#EDIR DATA#
LANG=CID="29162"IRIS EssentialsDocument Number 007-1342-080ContributorsWritten by Debbie Myers, Amy Smith, and Karin BordaEdited by Christina Cary© Copyright 1994, Silicon Graphics, Inc.name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' All Rights ReservedThis document contains proprietary and confidential information of Silicon Graphics, Inc. The contents of this document may not be disclosed to third parties, copied, or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without the prior written permission of Silicon Graphics, Inc.Restricted Rights LegendUse, duplication, or disclosure of the technical data contained in this document by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 52.227-7013 and/or in similar or successor clauses in the FAR, or in the DOD or NASA FAR Supplement. Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States. Contractor/manufacturer is Silicon Graphics, Inc., 2011 N. Shoreline Blvd., Mountain View, CA 94043-1389.IRIS Essentials Document Number 007-1342-080Silicon Graphics, Inc.  Mountain View, CaliforniaSilicon Graphics and IRIS are registered trademarks and InPerson, IRIS Showcase, IRIX, and Indy are trademarks of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company, Ltd. X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.Systems, Inc. LBL="1"Getting StartedWelcome to your IRIS® workstation and the world of visual processing! Once your IRIS workstation is up and running, you can begin learning about the environment in which you'll be working. IRIS Essentials will help you do just that. Turn to this guide to: get step-by-step instructions for completing essential tasks, such as printing files, finding files, and running applicationslearn techniques and shortcuts that will make you a more efficient IRIS userThis guide also serves as a referencename='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'a place to look when you need to know what a particular command does or on which menu it appears.If you have not yet set up your workstation, see your Owner's Guide for instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""About the Desktop When you log in, a collection of windows and icons appears on your screen by default. The collection of windows and icons is called a desk. The default desk, or working desk, contains:the toolcheststhe console windowthe desktop and the icons that appear on itLBL="" HELPID=""The ToolchestsThe stack of toolchests is similar to a phone book. It provides a listing of almost all of the system functions and programs. Move the cursor over a label on a toolchest, then press the left or right mouse button to pop up a menu.LBL="" HELPID=""The Console ID="ch11"The small box next to the toolchests is the console window. (It looks like a small box because it has been minimized.) Some of the error messages that the system generates appear in this window. Open it to its full size by clicking on it with the left mouse button. You can type IRIX commands in this window. For information on IRIX commands, see IDREF="64659" TYPE="TITLE"Appendix A, "Using IRIX Commands."LBL="" HELPID=""The DesktopID="ch12"The screen background is called the desktop. It's a place for you to set frequently used icons so you have quick and easy access to them. In this way, the desktop is similar to an actual office desk. For example, on the desk in your office, you might have a telephone, a container of pens and pencils, and a stack of folders or notebooks related to the projects on which you're currently working. Other items that are used less frequently are stashed away in desk drawers. By default, several icons are placed on the desktop: a folder icon representing your home directory, a dumpster icon, several application icons, and an icon for each peripheral you have installed. The peripheral icons show the current state of the devices they represent. For example, if you place a music CD into the compact disc player, the icon changes to display a few musical notes. When you double-click the icon, it opens CD Manager, a utility that lets you play and record from a compact disc.LBL="" HELPID=""Mouse Techniques and ShortcutsID="ch13"To get started, you need to know a few basic techniques for using the mouse and working with icons.To select an icon, place the cursor over the icon, then click the left mouse button. Icons turn yellow when they are selected.To select several icons, press the <
Shift> key while selecting the icons or press the left mouse button and drag the mouse. All icons touched by or within the box you create are selected.To open an icon, place the cursor over the icon, then  double-click the left mouse button. When you open an application icon, you run the application; when you open a folder icon, you open a window that shows the contents of that directory.To drag and drop icons, place the cursor on an icon, then press the left mouse button and move the mouse. Release the mouse button to drop the icon. Application and folder icons turn blue when they are ready to accept an icon. A drop pocket also turns blue when it is ready to accept an icon. This drag-and-drop technique lets you move icons from one directory to another, launch applications with a particular file, and place icons in drop pockets.In addition, you can use the drag-and-drop technique to send documents to other users. Each user is represented by an icon. Use the Search tool to find user icons, then drag a file icon and drop it onto a user icon. The drag-and-drop action automatically creates and sends an email message to the user; the file you dropped is attached to the email message. You receive an email message telling you if the file was sent successfully.NoteTo send files using the drag-and-drop technique, you must have installed Media Mail, the email application provided with your system.To display a pop-up menu that contains commands from the Selected menu, place the cursor over a window, then  press the right mouse button.LBL="" HELPID=""Adjusting the VolumeID="ch14"Use the Audio Control Panel to adjust the volume. To open the Audio Control Panel, click APP="/usr/sbin/apanel" PARMS=""Audio Control
, or choose "Audio Control" from the Desktop toolchest.You can also open the Audio Control Panel by following the instructions below:Choose "Control Panels" from the Icon Catalog menu on the Find toolchest. Double-click the icon labeled apanel. The Audio Control Panel appears.LBL="" HELPID=""Using Available SoftwareID="ch15"Your IRIS workstation includes many bundled software tools. Most of these tools have icons that appear on the desktop or on a page in the Icon Catalog. To open the Icon Catalog, choose an item from the Icon Catalog menu on the Find toolchest or click the words APP="/usr/sbin/iconbook" PARMS=""Icon Catalog
 now.Here are a few examples of the tools and their capabilities:Create and edit text files using jot and IRIS Showcase.Using IRIS Showcase, create interactive presentations that include 3D models, audio, video, and 2D graphics.Touch up images using the Image Vision tools.Keep track of the time and date using a clock and calendar program.Listen to compact discs or DAT tapes using CD Manager and DAT Manager.Create and edit audio files using Sound Editor.Create and watch movies using Movie Player and Movie Maker.LBL="" HELPID=""Using Online DocumentsAccess online help and online documentation from the Help toolchest. Choose "On-line Books" and the IRIS InSight Document Library appears. Once the Library is open, you can type in a word or phrase and quickly find and open the books that contain the information you need. See the IRIS InSight online help for instructions.Choose "Desktop Help" and a listing of system-level help appears. Additionally, each application provides a Help button or Help menu so that you can get help on a particular application.LBL="" HELPID=""ConventionsSome style conventions make the information in this guide easy to access and understand. This list tells you what they are.References to other documents are in italics.References to other chapters and sections within this guide are in "quotation marks."Names of buttons are in italics.Names of keys on the keyboard are in Courier bold font and are surrounded by angled brackets. For example, "press the <Enter> key."Names of menu choices are in "quotation marks." Numbered sentences are sequential steps you follow to complete a task. Sentences that follow a step and are preceded with a box are substeps; they describe in detail how to accomplish the step. Once you're familiar with the procedure, you probably won't need to refer to the substeps. Links to other sections are colored blue and links to glossary definitions are underlined.LBL="" HELPID=""Where to Go From HereTo learn how to access your workstationname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'log in, log out, and shut off the power name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' see IDREF="75214" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 2, "Accessing Your System."To learn how to find, run, and install applications, see IDREF="30776" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 3, "Using Applications."To learn how to work with files and directories, see IDREF="30345" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 4, "Creating, Editing, and Saving Your Work."To learn how to print files and customize printer settings, see IDREF="25430" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 5, "Printing,"To learn how to find and organize icons, see IDREF="57574" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 6, "Managing Icons."To learn how to organize windows into desks, see IDREF="68336" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 7, "Using Desks."To learn how to move, resize, and close windows, see IDREF="31412" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 8, "Managing Windows."To learn how to copy files across a network or to tape, and to set and change permission settings, see IDREF="90048" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 9, "Sharing and Protecting Work."For information on setting up and changing your working environment, see IDREF="73443" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 10, "Customizing the Desktop."For information on a particular menu, command, or button, see IDREF="91839" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 11, "Reference."To learn how to manage your IRIS, see the Personal System Administration Guide. It describes how to use the System Manager tools to maintain your IRIS and shell commands to augment the System Manager's capabilities. To learn how to use utilities such as jot, see the IRIS Utilities Guide.For information on your workstation, see the Owner's Guide that came with your workstation.LBL="2"ID="75214"Accessing Your SystemAn IRIS workstation requires that you log in to identify yourself as a user, log out to signal that you are finished using the workstation, and use a 
"System Shutdown" command before turning off the workstation. This chapter contains the following sections:IDREF="18050" TYPE="TITLE""Using Your Workstation"IDREF="37691" TYPE="TITLE""Using Existing Login Accounts"IDREF="86860" TYPE="TITLE""Why Create a Login Account?"IDREF="32662" TYPE="TITLE""Logging In"IDREF="27713" TYPE="TITLE""Logging In to Another System"IDREF="77546" TYPE="TITLE""Logging Out"IDREF="30866" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Off Your Workstation"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="18050"Using Your WorkstationIdentifying yourself as a username='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'logging inname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'is the first step you take to begin using your workstation. Creating your own login account is the second step. Initially, you can log in using one of the default login accounts. See IDREF="37691" TYPE="TITLE""Using Existing Login Accounts" to learn why you should limit your use of these accounts; see IDREF="86860" TYPE="TITLE""Why Create a Login Account?" to learn about the benefits of having your own login account. See IDREF="44182" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch5.doc" HDG="""Creating a User Login Account" in the Personal System Administration Guide to learn how to create your account.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="37691"Using Existing Login AccountsID="ch21"When you first turn on the system, you see icons for several existing accounts. Here's a brief description of four existing login accounts and their use:guest accountThe guest account lets you log in when you don't yet have your own account. It also allows other people to log in to your workstation and copy and view certain files.OutOfBox accountIf you have an IndyÔ workstation, you are automatically logged in to the OutOfBox account when you turn on your system for the first time. It takes you on a visual journey, during which movies, audio, and graphics help you explore the capabilities of your system. If you do not have an Indy workstation, you do not see this login account.root accountThe root account is for the administrator of the workstation. The root account gives the administrator special permissions and access to utilities that are not available to ordinary users. For example, when you are logged in as root, you can delete any file, regardless of who owns the file. Unless you are responsible for system administration on your workstation, you should log in as root infrequently. For an explanation of system administration, see IDREF="60520" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch1.doc" HDG="""Using System Administration Tools," in the Personal System Administration Guide.EZsetup accountThe EZsetup account lets you add an account for the Primary User of the system and enable networking. Once you add a password to the Administrator account (root) you'll need to know the root password to use the tool again. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="86860"Why Create a Login Account?ID="ch22"Creating a login account provides:Security. You can set a password that prevents other people from logging in with your name.Privacy. The system uses your login name to label files and directories that belong to you. You can read, change, and delete files and directories that belong to you, and you can protect your work from other users via permissions. See IDREF="29064" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding Permissions."Personal Preferences. You can modify your working environment in a variety of ways. For instance, you can place the icons you use frequently onto the desktop. When you log in, the desktop displays these icons. See IDREF="44182" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch5.doc" HDG="""Creating a User Login Account" in the Personal System Administration Guide to learn how to create your account.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="32662"Logging InID="ch23"When you see the login screen, you are ready to log in. Each icon on this screen represents a user who has a login account on the workstation. To log in, you select an icon, then  click the Login button.If you don't yet have a login account, see IDREF="44182" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch5.doc" HDG="""Creating a User Login Account" in the Personal System Administration Guide to learn how to create your account.Note
You can designate one account as the autologin account. The system to bypasses the login window and logs in that person every time the system starts up. For instructions, see "Customizing the Login Window" in Chapter 7 of the Personal System Administration Guide.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="27713"Logging In to Another SystemIf your workstation is part of a network of workstations, you may be able to log in to another workstation remotely name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' that is, sit in front of your workstation but access files on another workstation. Five sections are dedicated to this topic:IDREF="55177" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory on Another System"IDREF="43758" TYPE="TITLE""Logging In to Another System Using the rlogin Command"IDREF="16145" TYPE="TITLE""Using rsh to Perform Commands on Another System"IDREF="16798" TYPE="TITLE""Using telnet to Log In to Another System"LBL="" HELPID="newdir.Newdir.Help"ID="55177"Opening a Directory on Another SystemID="ch24"If your system is on a network, and you want to access files that are located on another system, you can open a Directory View of the remote directory that contains these files by using the Open Remote Directory form.To open the Open Remote Directory form, click the words APP="/usr/lib/desktop/newdir" PARMS=""Remote Directory
 now, or choose "Remote Directory" from the Desktop toolchest.To open a remote directory:In the text field below the "Open Remote Directory" label, type the full pathname of the remote directory Type the name of the remote system in the text field below the "On Host" label. In the text field below the "As User" label, type a username.You need to type in the name of a user who has a login account on the remote system and does not have a password. If you do not have an account on the remote system, or know another account name, try guest.After you have filled in the above information, click the Ok button.A Directory View window of the remote directory appears on your desktop. You can now navigate through other directories on the remote system, as long as the user you specified has read privileges on the directories you want to view.If the Directory View window doesn't appear, check the console window for error messages, and then check the following:ID="ch25"Is the hostname correct?Does the user you specified have an account on the remote system?Does the account have a password?Is the directory you specified a valid directory on the remote system?Does the user you specified have read privileges on the directory? If not, the owner of the directory must change the read permissions for that user.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="43758"Logging In to Another System Using the rlogin CommandID="ch26"The rlogin command lets you log in to another system. This example shows how to log in remotely to IRIS9 as guest. Note
If IRIS9 is in a different domain (bldg2, for example), you would use IRIS9.bldg2 in the example below instead of IRIS9.Open a shell by choosing 
"UNIX Shell" from the 
Desktop toolchest.See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window" for step-by-step instructions.Type: rlogin IRIS9 -l guestTo log out of IRIS9 when you are finished, type:exitThen press <Enter>.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="16145"Using rsh to Perform Commands on Another SystemID="ch27"rsh connects you to a remote workstation just long enough to run commands that you specify on the same command line as rsh. Once the command is finished, the connection is broken. For example, to find out who is logged in on IRIS9:Open a shell by choosing 
"UNIX Shell" from the 
Desktop toolchest.See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window" for step-by-step instructions.Type:rsh IRIS9 -l guest whoThis runs the command who on IRIS9 and returns the information to your shell window. If you don't specify a command, rsh behaves just like rlogin; it logs you into the remote workstation.For further details, see the reference pages (man pages) for rsh and rlogin. (If you need instructions on accessing man pages, see the online IRIS Utilities Guide.) LBL="" HELPID=""ID="16798"Using telnet to Log In to Another SystemID="ch28"The telnet program offers you another way of logging in to a remote workstation. To use telnet, you type a set of information into a shell window. Note
If IRIS9 is in a different domain (bldg2, for example), you would use IRIS9.bldg2 in the example below instead of IRIS9.Open a shell by choosing 
"UNIX Shell" from the 
Desktop toolchest.See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window" for step-by-step instructions.Type the name of the system to which you want to log in. For example, to log in to IRIS9, type:telnet IRIS9The screen shows:Trying 192.26.180.10...
Connected to IRIS9.
Escape character is '^]'.

IRIX System V.3 (IRIS9)
login:Type your login name (or guest, if you don't have an account on that system).Press <Enter>.If the system asks for a password, type it, then  press <Enter>.Use the remote workstation just as you use a shell window on your own system.When you are finished and want to end the connection to the remote system, type:logoutThen press <Enter>.The screen displays:Connection closed by foreign host.The telnet program has many options. See the telnet reference page (man page) for further details. (If you need instructions on accessing reference pages, see the online IRIS Utilities Guide.) LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77546" Logging OutID="ch29"You signal that you are finished using the system by logging out. Choose "Log Out" from the Desktop toolchest.A notifier appears asking if you really want to log out.Click the Yes button in the notifier to confirm that you want to log out.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="30866" Turning Off Your WorkstationID="ch210"Before turning off your workstation, you need to shut down the operating system. Shutting down the operating system safely closes all of the files and logs you out. If you turn off the workstation without shutting it down properly, files may be lost or damaged.To shut down the system:Choose "System Shutdown" from the System toolchest.If the system administrator's account has a password, a form appears. Type the password, then  press 
<Enter>.If you do not know the password, you cannot shut down the system. Contact the Primary Administrator.Click the Yes button on the notifier that appears to shut down the system.The system sends a message to everyone who is logged in remotely to your workstation name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' that is, people who are sitting in front of their own workstation but accessing files on your workstation. The message tells people that the system is about to be shut down and that they will be logged out.After a few seconds, you see this message on your workstation screen:Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restartTurn off the workstation using the power switch.LBL="3"ID="30776"Using ApplicationsThis chapter contains:IDREF="87920" TYPE="TITLE""Installing Applications"IDREF="23904" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Available Applications"IDREF="81472" TYPE="TITLE""Running Applications"IDREF="43089" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Applications"IDREF="27942" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Collection of Application Icons"IDREF="19571" TYPE="TITLE""Copying and Pasting Between Applications"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="87920"Installing ApplicationsID="ch31"To install applications that came from your system's manufacturer, the administrator of your system must use the Software Manager. See "Installing Applications" in the Personal System Administration Guide for information. To install software from other vendors, see the instructions that came with the software.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="23904"Finding Available ApplicationsID="ch32"You can find applications that are installed on your system in one of several ways:Use the Icon Catalog. It shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. To open the Icon Catalog, click the words APP="/usr/sbin/iconbook" PARMS=""Icon Catalog
 now, or choose an item from the Icon Catalog menu on the Find toolchest.See the Help menu on the Icon Catalog for information on using the tool.Use the Search tool to find the application icon. To open the Search tool, click the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or choose "Files" from the Find toolchest.See the Help menu on the Search tool for information on using the tool.If you know the name of the application, choose "an Icon" from the Find toolchest in the text field below the "As User" label. type the application name in the window that appears. The application icon appears in the drop pocket to the left of the type-in field. Click the Help button on the Find an Icon window for more details.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="81472"Running ApplicationsID="ch33"This section lists three techniques for running applications: double-clicking icons, using the "Open Icon" command, and dragging and dropping icons. Also see IDREF="84894" TYPE="TITLE""Saving Your Desktop Layout." It describes how to make applications start up automatically when you log in.LBL="" HELPID=""Running Applications by Double-ClickingThe easiest way to run an application is to place the cursor over the application icon in the text field below the "As User" label. double-click with the left mouse button. If you use an application frequently, drag the icon onto the desktop so it is easily accessible. See also IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons."LBL="" HELPID=""Running Applications Using the "Open Icon" CommandID="ch34"You can run an application by using the "
Open Icon" command on the Selected menu.Place the cursor over the icon in the text field below the "As User" label. click the left mouse button to select the icon. The icon turns yellow when it's selected.Choose "Open Icon" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the icon. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Open Icon" from the Selected toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="85979"Running Applications by Dragging and Dropping IconsDragging and dropping icons allows you to pick both the file and the application that you want to open.Place the cursor over the icon of the file you want to view or edit. The icon brightens slightly when the cursor is above it.Press and hold down the left mouse button. The icon turns yellow.Drag the cursor and icon until they are over the application icon. The icon travels with the cursor, leaving behind a gray outline.When the application icon turns blue, release the mouse button.The icon you dragged returns to its original location. The application runs and the file opens.NoteIf the application icon doesn't turn blue when you drag an icon on top of it, click once on the application icon, then try dragging and dropping again. If the icon still does not turn blue, the system can't perform the operation. For example, a folder icon won't turn blue if you drag a file onto it but do not have permission to write to that directory.LBL="" HELPID="launch_help"ID="52986"Running Applications With Command Line OptionsID="ch35"Some applications let you specify the mode in which you want them to run. You do so by specifying a command line option. You usually type command line options into a shell window. This section describes how you can specify a command line option without using a shell window.For example, to run IRIS Showcase, the drawing and presentation package that came with your system, in view-only mode:Place the cursor over the IRIS Showcase icon, press the <
Alt> key, and double-click the left mouse button.A form appears. The text that appears is the IRIX command required to run the application.Type the command line option after the text in the text field below the "As User" label. click the Accept button or press <
Enter>. In this example, you add -v to the end of the line.Many applications offer command line options. Refer to the man pages to find out available command line options for a particular command. LBL="" HELPID=""Accessing Applications on Remote SystemsID="ch36"If your workstation is part of a network, you can use applications that are stored on another workstation. To do this, use the Open Remote Directory form or use a shell window.LBL="" HELPID=""Using the "Remote Directory" Command to Run Applications on Another SystemID="ch37"To open the Open Remote Directory form, click the words APP="/usr/lib/desktop/newdir" PARMS=""Remote Directory
 now, or choose "Remote Directory" from the Desktop toolchest.To access an application from a remote system:In the text field below the "Open Remote Directory" label, .type the full pathname of the remote directory that contains the application.In the text field below the "On Host" label, tpe the name of the remote system. In the text field below the "As User" label, type a user name.You need to type in the name of a user who has a login account on the remote system. If you do not have an account on the remote system, or don't know another account name, try guest. If the account has a password, you will be prompted to type in the password. After you have filled in the above information, click the Ok button.A Directory View of the remote directory appears on your screen.Double-click the application icon to open the application.The application window appears on your desktop.LBL="" HELPID=""Using the rlogin Command to Run Applications on Another SystemID="ch38"If your workstation is part of a network, you can use applications that are stored on another workstation. To do this, you can log in to the other workstation in the text field below the "As User" label. tell the application to display its windows on your workstation screen.Open a shell window by choosing "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest. When you see a red outline, click the left mouse button to place the window.Place the cursor in the shell window, then type:rlogin workstationname -l guestThen press 
<Enter>.After a few seconds, you see a message in the shell window that tells you the name of the workstation you logged in to, the version of software it is running, and some copyright information.NoteIf the workstation you are logging in to is in a different domain, you need to specify the domain name. For example, if you are logging in to a workstation named ambrosia, and it is part of a domain named bldg2, you need to type ambrosia.bldg2.Set the DISPLAY environment variable by typing:setenv DISPLAY yourworkstationname:0.0The DISPLAY environment variable specifies which workstation screen will display the program.Type printenv to make sure DISPLAY is set properly.You should see a line similar to this:DISPLAY=yourworkstationame:0.0Type the program name into the shell window in the text field below the "As User" label. press 
<Enter>.NoteThe command you type may be different from the full program name. For example, to run IRIS Showcase you type: showcaseThe program should appear on your screen.When you are finished working with the application and want to log out of the other workstation, type:exitThen press 
<Enter>.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="43089"Removing Applications ID="ch39"When your system starts getting low on disk space, you may want to review the list of software products that are currently installed.You may no longer need certain products, or you may discover that some products include large, optional subsystems that you can remove without removing the core product. See IDREF="37464" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch4.doc" HDG="""Removing Optional Software" in the Personal System Administration Guide for information.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="27942"Creating a Collection of Application IconsID="ch310"The Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. You can also use the Icon Catalog to create your own collection of icons. For example, suppose you use a suite of tools to create 3D models. You can place them all on a page in the Icon Catalog so they are easily accessible.To open the Icon Catalog, click the words APP="/usr/sbin/iconbook" PARMS=""Icon Catalog
 now, or choose an item from the Icon Catalog menu on the Find Toolchest. See the Help menu on the Icon Catalog for information on using the tool. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="19571"Copying and Pasting Between ApplicationsSome applications support a global copy and paste mechanism. This means you can copy and paste text, sound, images, and more from one application to another. For example, suppose you want to copy an image from an IRIS ShowcaseÔ page and place it onto the InPersonÔ whiteboard. You can do so using the "Copy" and "Paste" commands on the Edit menu or the middle mouse button.To use the "Copy" and "Paste" commands on the Edit menu:Select the image on the IRIS Showcase page.The image is surrounded by green selection boxes when it's selected.Choose "Copy" from the Edit menu in IRIS Showcase.Choose "Paste" from the Edit menu in the InPerson window.The image appears on the whiteboard.To copy the image using the middle mouse button:Select the image on the IRIS Showcase page.The image is surrounded by green selection boxes when it's selected. This object is called the "primary selection" because it is the most recent selection.Before clicking the left mouse button or making another selection, place the cursor over the InPerson whiteboard, then click the middle mouse button.The image appears on the whiteboard.LBL="4"ID="30345"Creating, Editing, and Saving Your WorkThis chapter explains how to view, edit, and create files, as well as how to organize them into directories. The sections are:IDREF="11175" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory: Basic Instructions"IDREF="65999" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory: A Summary of Available Methods"IDREF="60825" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Remote Directory"IDREF="90910" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Directory"IDREF="23076" TYPE="TITLE""Opening Files"IDREF="76008" TYPE="TITLE""Saving Files"IDREF="83384" TYPE="TITLE""Naming Icons: A Few Guidelines"IDREF="44753" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming Files and Directories"IDREF="34177" TYPE="TITLE""Moving Icons"IDREF="27742" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Icons"IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files"LBL="" HELPID="fm1"ID="11175"Opening a Directory: Basic InstructionsID="ch41"You can open a directory in several ways:If the folder icon is visible, place the cursor over the folder icon, then double-click the left mouse button. A new Directory View window appears. If an arrow appears next to the folder icon, place the cursor over the arrow then click the left mouse button. The contents of that directory are listed underneath the folder icon. This arrow appears only when you're viewing icons in a Directory View window as a list. See IDREF="98676" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing Icons as a List."If the folder icon is not visible in the Directory View window, enter a new directory name into the icon finder at the top of the window. IDREF="18453" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 4-1 shows the icon finder.The icon finder displays the pathname of the current directory. You can type in a new directory name, or you can use the bar above the field to select a new directory. See IDREF="88041" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the Icon Finder" for details.FILE="pathfinder.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="4-1"Figure 4-1 ID="18453"The Icon FinderFor information on alternate methods, see IDREF="65999" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory: A Summary of Available Methods."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="65999"Opening a Directory: A Summary of Available MethodsThis section lists the ways in which you can open a directory. Place the cursor over a folder icon, then double-click the left mouse button. Select a folder icon, then choose "Open Icon" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the icon. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Open Icon" from the Selected toolchest. See IDREF="87875" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the "Open Icon" Command" for step-by-step instructions.Place the cursor over the arrow that appears next to the folder icon, then click the left mouse button. The contents of that directory are listed underneath the folder icon. This arrow appears only when you're viewing icons in a Directory View window as a list. See IDREF="98676" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing Icons as a List."Drag and drop a folder icon into the drop pocket on a Directory View window. The window changes to display the contents of the directory whose folder icon you dropped. See IDREF="88041" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the Icon Finder" for details.Type a new pathname into the icon finder at the top of the Directory View window. See IDREF="88041" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the Icon Finder" for details.Choose "Home Directory" from the Desktop toolchest. This opens a Directory View window that displays the contents of your home directory.Choose "Remote Directory" from the Desktop toolchest. This opens a form into which you type the name of the directory you want to open and the remote system on which it's located.Choose "Find an Icon" from a Selected menu or "an Icon" from the Find toolchest. This opens a form into which you can type the name of the directory you want to open.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="87875"Opening a Directory Using the "Open Icon" CommandID="ch42"The "Open Icon" command opens the selected icons. You can use this to open a directory.Select the folder icon that represents the directory you want to open. The folder icon turns yellow when it's selected.Choose "Open Icon" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the icon. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Open Icon" from the Selected toolchest.A green Directory View window appears. It displays the contents of the selected directory.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="88041"Opening a Directory Using the Icon FinderThe icon finder appears at the top of each Directory View window. You can open a new directory in one of three ways: type a directory name in the type in-field, drop a folder icon into the drop pocket, or use the pathbar above the type-in field to select a directory name.LBL="" HELPID=""Typing a New Name Into the Icon FinderThe icon finder shows the pathname of the directory that is displayed. See IDREF="59638" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 4-2.FILE="pathfinder.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="4-2"Figure 4-2 ID="59638"The Icon FinderYou can edit the name, as follows:To replace the existing directory name, place the cursor in the pink type-in field, then double-click to select the existing text. Begin typing. The existing name disappears, and the new name appears as you type.To edit a portion of the directory name, place the cursor within the name. Press the left mouse button and drag the cursor to highlight the section you want to change, or press the 
<Backspace> key to delete characters to the left of the cursor.NoteIf your system is on a network, you can open directories on other systems. See IDREF="99454" TYPE="TITLE""The Pathname Field" for more information.LBL="" HELPID=""Placing an Icon Into the Drop PocketID="ch43"The drop pocket is the small square to the left of the pink type-in field. See IDREF="55448" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 4-3. FILE="droppocket.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="4-3"Figure 4-3 ID="55448"A drop pocket.When you place an icon in the drop pocket, the Directory View window changes. Drag a folder icon and place it in the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of that folder.Drag a file or application icon and place it in the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of the directory in which that icon is stored. For example, suppose you drag the IRIS Showcase icon into the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of the /usr/sbin directory.LBL="" HELPID=""Using the Path Bar in the Icon FinderID="ch44"The path bar is the gray bar above the pink type-in field. It lets you move from one directory to another, without typing. It contains a small button representing each directory in the pathname. Click a button to display the contents of that directory. See IDREF="60723" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 4-4.FILE="pathbar.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="4-4"Figure 4-4 ID="60723"Using the path barLBL="" HELPID=""Using the Recycle ButtonID="ch45"The recycle button appears to the right of the icon finder. Press this button to display a listing of directories whose contents you have previously displayed in the window. Choose an item from the list to display that directory again.LBL="" HELPID="fm_openremotedir"ID="60825"Opening a Remote DirectoryID="ch46"If your machine is on a network, you can open directories on other systems on the network. You can do so in any of several ways:In the pathname field at the top of a Directory View window, type /hosts/remotesystemname followed by the name of a remote directory. If you have permission to view that directory, the contents of the remote directory appear in the current window. See IDREF="99454" TYPE="TITLE""The Pathname Field" for further instructions.Choose the "Remote Directory" command from the Desktop toolchest. In the form that appears, specify the system name, the directory name, and the name of the user as whom you want to view the directory contents. Click the Help button on the form for more details.Choose "NFS Mount Manager" from the System toolchest to make a permanent NFS mount. With a permanent mount, you can specify a specific location within your own filesystem from which you can access the remote directory. Permanent NFS mounts must be made by a Privileged User. Click the Help button on the form for more details.LBL="" HELPID="fm2"ID="90910"Creating a DirectoryID="ch47"To create a new directory, choose "New Directory" from the Selected menu. The new directory appears as a folder icon in the window. Detailed instructions follow.Open the directory in which you want to create a new directory. For this example, suppose it's your home directory. Place the cursor over the folder icon that represents your home directory, then double-click the left mouse button.Choose "New Directory" from the Selected menu. A folder icon appears in the window. It's labeled empty.dir. If you create another new directory, it is named empty1.dir.See IDREF="44753" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming Files and Directories" for instructions on renaming a directory.NoteIf you want the folder icon to automatically appear on the desktop, choose "New Directory" from the Selected toolchest. The folder icon appears on the desktop; the directory is stored in your home directory. For example, suppose your user name is dorothy and you create a directory named oz on the desktop. The pathname for the directory is /usr/people/dorothy/oz.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="23076" Opening FilesID="ch48"Open a file when you want to view or edit the file. You can open it in one of several ways: using the "Open Icon" command, double-clicking the file's icon, or using the drag-and-drop technique.LBL="" HELPID=""Opening Files by Double-Clicking IconsThe easiest way to open a file is to place the cursor over the file icon, then double-click with the left mouse button. If you use a file frequently, place the icon on a shelf, or drag the icon onto the desktop so it is easily accessible. See also IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons."LBL="" HELPID=""Opening Files Using the "Open Icon" CommandYou can open a file by using the "
Open Icon" command on the Selected menu.Place the cursor over the icon, then click the left mouse button to select the icon. The icon turns yellow when it's selected.Choose "Open Icon" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the icon. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Open Icon" from the Selected toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""Opening Files by Dragging and DroppingYou can open a file by dragging its icon onto an application icon and then dropping it. See also IDREF="85979" TYPE="TITLE""Running Applications by Dragging and Dropping Icons."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="76008"Saving FilesID="ch49"Most applications display a File Browser when you choose the "Save" or "Save As..." command. The File Browser makes it easy for you to save a file in a particular directory. If you do not specify a directory, the system places files in a default location, depending on the place from which you run the application.If you run an application from the desktop, the file is saved in your home directory.If you run an application from a Directory View window, the file is saved in that Directory View window.If you run an application from a page in the Icon Catalog or Search tool, the file is saved in your home directory.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="83384"Naming Icons: A Few GuidelinesID="ch410"When naming icons, follow these guidelines:Use only letters, characters, and underscores in your file name.Take note of capitalization. file and File are two different names.Blank spaces are replaced with underscores when you change the name of an icon in a Directory View window. Do not use blank spaces if you rename a file using an IRIX command in a shell window. IRIX does not replace blank spaces with underscores, so you'll have problems accessing the file later.Each file, directory, and application in a directory must have a unique name. If you try to name a file Test and a file named Test already exists in that directory, one of two things happens: you get a notifier warning you that you're about to overwrite an existing file, or the existing file is replaced with another of the same name. You can specify which behavior you want. See IDREF="26861" TYPE="TITLE""Turning File Overwrite Messages On and Off."LBL="" HELPID="fm3"ID="44753"Renaming Files and DirectoriesID="ch411"Many applications let you rename a file using a "Save As..." command. If you are not running an application, you can rename a file from the desktop. Select the icon, edit the name, and then press the 
<Enter> key or click the left mouse button in the window. Detailed instructions follow.Select the icon you want to rename. The icon turns yellow and a white rectangle appears around the name. If you do not have permission to change the name, the white rectangle does not appear.Edit the name. For advice on choosing a name, see also IDREF="83384" TYPE="TITLE""Naming Icons: A Few Guidelines."To replace the existing name, begin typing. The existing name disappears, and the new name appears as you type. To edit a portion of the name, place the cursor within the white rectangle surrounding the name, then click the left mouse button to place a marker. Begin typing to add characters after the marker; press the 
<Back Space> key to delete characters preceding the marker. To replace or delete several characters, press the left mouse button and drag the cursor over the characters. Release the mouse button when the characters you want to delete or replace are selected. A white rectangle surrounds these characters.To delete the characters, press the 
<Back Space> key; to replace the characters, begin typing.To apply the name, press 
<Enter> or click the left mouse button in the window.If you do not press <
Enter> or click the mouse button, the original name returns. LBL="" HELPID="fm4"ID="34177"Moving IconsID="ch412"You can move icons into a different directory when you want to change their location in the file system. To do so, drag the icon from one Directory View window into another Directory View window or onto a folder icon. (If you have placed an icon on the desktop and want to move it off of the desktop, see IDREF="60496" TYPE="TITLE""Putting Away an Icon.")Place the cursor over the icon, then press and hold down the left mouse button. The icon turns yellow.Continue pressing the mouse button, then drag the cursor into a different Directory View window or on top of a folder icon. The icon travels with the cursor, leaving behind a gray outline.Release the mouse button.If you have a Directory View open, release the mouse button when the cursor is inside the window.If you're dragging the icon onto a folder icon, release the mouse button when the folder icon turns blue.The icon moves. It disappears from the original directory and appears in the new directory.NoteWhen you move an icon from one folder to another, you actually change its location in the file system. For example, if you move an icon from a directory called reports to a directory called memos, the file disappears from the reports directory and appears in the memos directory. If your computer is on a network, you can open a directory on another computer, and drag icons in and out of that directory. In this case, dragging and dropping an icon makes a copy of the icon. It doesn't move the icon from one computer to another.When you move an icon onto the ID="ch413"desktop or onto a shelf, you do not change its location in the file system. The file is still stored in its original directory, even if the directory is on a remote system; the icon appears on the desktop or shelf so it's easier for you to access. The same is true with the Icon Catalog. Dragging an icon onto a page in the Icon Catalog makes it easier to access. It does not move the file.ID="ch414"LBL="" HELPID="fm5"ID="27742"Copying IconsID="ch415"You can copy an icon in one of two ways: Select the icon that you want to copy, then choose "Make Copy" from the Selected menu. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Make Copy" from the Selected toolchest. A copy of the selected icon appears. It's labeled copy_of_filename. Press the <
Ctrl> key, then select an icon. Continue pressing the <
Ctrl> key and drag the icon to a new location. Release the mouse button and <
Ctrl> key a copy of the icon appears. It's labeled copy_of_filename. (If you drag the icon into a new directory before releasing the mouse button, the icon doesn't have the copy_of_ prefix.)See IDREF="44753" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming Files and Directories" to learn how to change the name of the file you copied. For instructions on copying an icon on another system, see IDREF="77689" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files Across the Network." For instructions on copying files to and from a floppy disk or tape, see IDREF="31349" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files to and From a Floppy Disk" and IDREF="60620" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files to and From a Tape."NoteIf you copy an icon that is on a page in the Icon Catalog or on the desktop, the copied icon appears next to the original icon and in your home directory. If you copy an icon on a shelf, the copied icon appears next to the original icon, and also appears in the directory to which the shelf is attached. LBL="" HELPID="fm5b"ID="27460"Making a Linked CopyID="ch416"You can access an icon from several different places by putting it on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog. For details, see IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons." You can also use the "Make Linked Copy" command. A link lets you access an icon from several different places, and give it a unique name in each place. See IDREF="15568" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked Copies" for details on the two techniques.To make a linked copy:Select the icon that you want to copy. The icon turns yellow when it's selected.Choose "Make Linked Copy" from the Selected menu. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Make Linked Copy" from the Selected toolchest.A linked copy of the icon appears next to the old one. It's named link.to.originalname and has an "L" next to the icon.Rename the file. See IDREF="44753" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming Files and Directories" for details.Move the linked copy as you would move any other icon. See IDREF="34177" TYPE="TITLE""Moving Icons."NoteWhen you change the original file, all linked copies are changed as well. The same is true if you change a linked copy; the original and all other linked copies are changed. If you delete the original file, the linked copy no longer has a place to point. The icon changes into a ring to indicate that it is an empty file. If you try to open the link, a notifier appears telling you that the link points to a file that doesn't exist. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="15568"Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked CopiesID="ch417"When you place an icon on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog, you give yourself another reference to or place from which to access the icon. You can also use the "Make Linked Copy" command to make linked copies of an icon. The result is slightly different:A small "L" appears next to linked copies. You can rename a linked copy so it has a unique name in each location. When you drag an icon onto the desktop, a shelf, or a page in the Icon Catalog, you maintain the same name in all locations.When you remove a linked copy, only that linked copy is removed; the original and any other links still exist. When you remove an icon on the desktop, a shelf, or a page in the Icon Catalog, you remove the original icon and all other references to it.If you delete the original file, a linked copy no longer has a place to point. The icon changes into a ring to indicate that it is an empty file. If you try to open the link, a notifier appears telling you that the link points to a file that doesn't exist. LBL="" HELPID="fm6"ID="27933"Removing FilesID="ch418"Deleting a file or directory is a two-step process. You place the file in the dumpster, then you empty the dumpster.To place an icon in the dumpster, you can drag the icon and drop it onto the dumpster icon, or you can use the "Remove" command. To use the "Remove" command:Select the icon that you want to remove. The icon turns yellow when it's selected.Choose "Remove" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the icon. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Remove" from the Selected toolchest.The icon disappears from the window and is placed in the dumpster. This behavior applies to all icons that you have permission to remove, no matter where they are locatedname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' in a Directory View window, on a page in the Icon Catalog, or on the desktop.The dumpster icon is stored in your home directory and is placed on the desktop so you can easily access it.Choose "Empty Dumpster" from the Desktop toolchest.This permanently deletes the file from the system's disk.NoteYou can also empty the dumpster by doing the following: Select the dumpster icon in a Directory View window, then choose "Empty Dumpster" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the dumpster icon.You can change the behavior of the "Remove" command so that it automatically deletes files from the system's disk. For information, see IDREF="32491" TYPE="TITLE""Disabling the Dumpster."LBL="5"ID="25430"PrintingOnce the Administrator or a Privileged User has used the Printer Manager to set up a printer for your system (see IDREF="46932" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch3.doc" HDG=""IDREF="46932" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch3.doc" HDG="""Setting Up Printer Connections"), you can print files and directories from your desktop. These are the methods you can use:dragging them onto a printer icon,dragging them onto the PrintPanel icon to customize the jobselecting the file or directory, then choosing "Print" from the Selected toolchest or directory view menuThis chapter contains these sections:IDREF="90126" TYPE="TITLE""Summary of the Printing Environment and Tools"IDREF="85576" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Available Printers on Your Desktop"IDREF="82889" TYPE="TITLE""Printing Files"IDREF="74738" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Print Jobs"IDREF="89039" TYPE="TITLE""Setting Printer-Specific Options"IDREF="19205" TYPE="TITLE""Monitoring Print Jobs and Printers"IDREF="88221" TYPE="TITLE""Designating a Default Printer"IDREF="98066" TYPE="TITLE""Troubleshooting Printing"LBL="" HELPID="print_toolSummary"ID="90126"Summary of the Printing Environment and ToolsThe graphical printing environment provides all the tools you need to set up printing software, and to print files and monitor print jobs. Click a topic for summary information.IDREF="90872" TYPE="TITLE""About the Printer Manager"IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons"IDREF="85047" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintStatus"IDREF="24334" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintPanel"IDREF="70177" TYPE="TITLE""About File Format Filters"IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="90872"About the Printer ManagerID="ch4B1"The Printer Manager lets a Privileged User access printers that are connected to either the user's own system or another system on the network. Once a printer is set up, you can drag its icon from the Printer Manager onto your desktop for use (see IDREF="85576" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Available Printers on Your Desktop" and IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons").You can start the Printer Manager in two ways:Choose "Printer Manager" from the System toolchest.Choose "Printer Manager" from the Other Tools menu in PrintStatus (see IDREF="85047" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintStatus").For detailed information on using the Printer Manager, see IDREF="46932" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch3.doc" HDG="""Setting Up Printer Connections."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="76676"About Desktop Printer IconsID="ch4B2"Once you place a printer icon on your desktop (see IDREF="85576" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Available Printers on Your Desktop"), you can:drag a file onto the printer to print a document (see also IDREF="70177" TYPE="TITLE""About File Format Filters")double-click the printer to start PrintStatus, a tool that shows detailed status of the printer and its queue and lets you manage the queue (see IDREF="85047" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintStatus")If the printer is an Impressario printer (see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario"), you can also visually monitor the icon; it changes when the printer has jobs in its queue or when it is experiencing any problems.Idle printerThe printer icon has no paper emerging from it. The printer may be printing jobs that belong to other users, but it is not printing any jobs for you.Busy printerThe printer icon has paper emerging from it. It is printing one or more jobs for you.Broken printerThe printer icon has smoke emerging from it, and appears to be squashed. The printer cannot print for some reason (for example, it is jammed or out of paper). For more information on the problem, double-click this printer to see the PrintStatus window.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="85047"About PrintStatusID="ch4B3"PrintStatus lets any User view a printer's queue, and cancel jobs submitted by that person. A Privileged User can cancel jobs submitted by any user, and can also enable or disable the printer's queue. The Administrator (root) can also forward print jobs from one printer to another.You can start PrintStatus in several ways:Double-click a printer icon on the desktop (see IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons").Select a printer and choose "PrintStatus" from the Other Tools menu in PrintPanel (see IDREF="24334" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintPanel").Select a printer and choose "Show Queue" from the Printer menu in the Printer Manager (see IDREF="90872" TYPE="TITLE""About the Printer Manager").Choose a printer in the "PrintStatus for" rollover menu in the Other Tools menu in PrintStatus (this works only if you have more than one printer available).For more details on PrintStatus, see IDREF="19205" TYPE="TITLE""Monitoring Print Jobs and Printers."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="24334"About PrintPanelID="ch4B4"PrintPanel lets you customize print jobs. For example, you can specify the number of copies you want to print, or customize the banner page of a particular print job. If the system to which a printer is physically connected has the Impressario software installed, you can set many more advanced, printer-specific printing options. (For more information, see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario" and IDREF="89039" TYPE="TITLE""Setting Printer-Specific Options.")For convenience, place the PrintPanel icon on your desktop by following these steps:Choose "An Icon" from the Find toolchest.In the Find an Icon text field, type:/usr/sbin/PrintPanelWhen the PrintPanel icon appears in the drop pocket, drag the icon onto the desktop.You can start PrintPanel in several ways:Double-click the PrintPanel icon on the desktop.Drag a file onto the PrintPanel icon on the desktop.Choose "PrintPanel" from the Other Tools menu in PrintStatus.For detailed information on using PrintPanel, see IDREF="74738" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Print Jobs."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="70177"About File Format FiltersID="ch4B5"The system does not supply any standard file format filters. This means that when you send a file to a printer by dragging it onto either a printer icon or the PrintPanel icon, or by selecting the file and choosing "Print" from the Selected menu, the system sends the file directly to the printer without changing its format. Depending on the file type and printer type, the printer may not be able to print the file.In general, you can print by dragging files in these cases:drag a PostScript or ASCII file on a PostScript printerdrag an ASCII file on an ASCII or dumb printerdrag an SGI Image file on a dumb raster or dumb color printerMany applications include file format filters. When you give a print command within an application, it often converts the file to a standard format (such as PostScript®) before sending it to a printer. Or, it may give you the option of saving a file as PostScript or as text. Once you have done this, you may be able to drag the resulting file onto a printer icon (if the printer supports that format).If the system to which a printer is physically connected has the optional Impressario software, you can print many additional file types. For more information, see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario."Because the additional Impressario filters are available only on the system to which the printer is physically connected, you cannot drag files of these types onto a printer or PrintPanel icon on your own desktop to print them. Instead, you must follow these steps:On your own system, choose "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.In the window that appears, type:lp filename -dprinternameWhere filename is the name of your file, and printername is the name of the printer.To close the window, type:logoutLBL="" HELPID=""ID="66378"About ImpressarioID="ch4B6"Impressario provides a full range of tools and drivers for printing, viewing, and scanning a variety of image types. The product includes:sophisticated printer drivers that let you control the printers' advanced capabilities through a software options panel, and report up-to-the-minute status on the printers and print jobsscanners, a tool that lets you configure new scanners, gscan, a tool that lets you scan images from an IRIS screen, an image file, or a scanner bed, and several scanner driversvstiff, a Stream TIFF viewer that lets you view any file type that your system can print22 additional Adobe fonts (for a total of 35)behind-the-scenes filters that can convert most file types to a format that you can view or print (see also IDREF="70177" TYPE="TITLE""About File Format Filters")To check whether a printer is connected to a system that has Impressario software, double-click the printer icon to start PrintStatus, and check the message in the Current Printer Status area. If it's an Impressario printer, you see a message similar to this:Impressario 1.1 LaserWriter driver, version 1.10Also, when you use PrintPanel to customize a job for the printer, the More Options button will be available so you can set advanced, printer-specific Impressario printing options. (For more information, see IDREF="89039" TYPE="TITLE""Setting Printer-Specific Options.")If you have Impressario installed, you can find detailed information about it in the online Impressario User's Guide. To access this book, choose "On-line Books" from the Help toolchest, then double-click the Impressario User's Guide icon in the SGI_EndUser bookshelf.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="85576"Placing Available Printers on Your DesktopID="ch4B7"When a Privileged User sets up the system to access a printer that's connected to either your own system or another system on the network, an icon for that printer appears in the Printer Manager. Users can then place the icon onto their personal desktops for easy access to the printer's queue and for drag and drop printing. (S ee also IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons.") To place a printer on your desktop, follow these steps:Start the Printer Manager by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/printers" PARMS=""Printer Manager
, or by choosing "Printer Manager" from the System toolchestDrag the icon onto the desktop.Close the Printer Manager by choosing "Quit" from the Printer menu.A Privileged User can also use the Search tool to locate printers that are connected to other systems on the network, and to drag those icons onto the desktop for use. This has the same effect as using the Printer Manager to install a network printer; that is, once the printer is dragged onto the desktop, it also appears in the Printer Manager window.ID="ch4B8"To search for network printers and place them on the desktop, follow these steps:Choose "Printers" from the Find toolchest.In the Search tool, use the Match menu to specify the type of printer you want to find (use the Help menu in this window for details).Click the Search button. After a few moments, one or more printer icons should appear in the light blue area of the window.If no printers appear, either none are available, or none match the search criteria that you specified.Drag one or more printer icons onto your desktop.To remove a printer icon from your desktop but keep it available in the Printer Manager, any user can select the icon and choose "Put Away" from the Selected toolchest.A Privileged User can remove a printer from all desktops and from the Printer Manager by following these steps:Choose "Printer Manager" from the System toolchest.Select the printer and choose "Delete" from the Printer menu. Users on your system can no longer access the printer.LBL="" HELPID="fm7"ID="82889"Printing FilesID="ch4B9"You can print files from the desktop or from within an application. Click a topic for more information.IDREF="20749" TYPE="TITLE""Printing by Dragging Icons Onto Printers or PrintPanel"IDREF="74395" TYPE="TITLE""Printing Using the Desktop "Print" Command"IDREF="95394" TYPE="TITLE""Printing From an Application"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="20749"Printing by Dragging Icons Onto Printers or PrintPanelID="ch4B10"If no printer icons appear on your desktop, see IDREF="85576" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Available Printers on Your Desktop.". You can then print may types of files (see IDREF="70177" TYPE="TITLE""About File Format Filters") by following these steps:Drag the file icon onto the printer icon.If you drag a folder icon onto the printer icon, you print a list of all the files and directories within the directory.To check on the progress of your print job, double-click the printer icon. It shows a queue of jobs waiting to be printed.You can customize a print job. For example, to specify how many copies to print or to customize the banner page, you can drag a file onto the PrintPanel icon. (For details on placing the PrintPanel icon on the desktop and using PrintPanel, see IDREF="74738" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Print Jobs.")LBL="" HELPID=""ID="74395"Printing Using the Desktop "Print" CommandID="ch4B11"The "Print" command is available in the Selected menu of each directory view, and in the Selected toolchest. You can print many types of files using this command.  (See IDREF="70177" TYPE="TITLE""About File Format Filters.") Follow these steps to use the "Print" command:Select the icon that you want to print.Select a folder icon if you want to print a list of all the files and directories within that directory.Choose "Print" from the Selected menu on the window that contains the icon. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "Print" from the Selected toolchest.The file is sent to your default printer. To specify a default printer, see IDREF="88221" TYPE="TITLE""Designating a Default Printer."To monitor the progress of the job, you may want to drag the printer icon onto your desktop; see IDREF="85576" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Available Printers on Your Desktop."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="95394"Printing From an ApplicationMany applications include print commands. Typically, when you give the print command, the application looks for a specific printer. Consult the documentation that came with the application to learn how to specify which printer the application should use.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="74738"Customizing Print JobsID="ch4B12"Use PrintPanel to customize your printing jobs. If the PrintPanel icon is not on your desktop, you can place it there by following these steps:Choose "An Icon" from the Find toolchest.In the Find an Icon text field, type:/usr/sbin/PrintPanelWhen the PrintPanel icon appears in the drop pocket, drag the icon onto the desktop.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_overview"Overview of PrintPanelID="ch4B13"PrintPanel lets you customize print jobs. For example, you can specify the number of copies you want to print, or customize the banner page of a particular print job. To use PrintPanel, follow these general steps:Specify the file in the Files to print field. Click a printer in the Available printers list to select one.Set printing options in the Options area.If the More Options button is not greyed out, the selected printer is an Impressario printer. (See IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario.") You can click this button to further customize the job.If you want these options  to apply to future print jobs, click the Save Options button.Send the file to the printer by clicking the Print button.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_menus"About the MenusThe File menu contains these choices:"Print" sends the selected file to the highlighted printer. (The filename appears in the Files to print field; the printer name is highlighted in the Available printers list specified in the Options area.) Choosing "Print" is the same as clicking the Print button."Open..." brings up the File Open window, which lets you browse through the filesystem for a file."More Options..." is available only if the Impressario software is installed on the system to which the printer is connected.  (See IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario.") This option brings up an advanced, printer-specific options window. It is identical to clicking the More Options button."Save Options..." saves all the options that you set in both the Options area and in the window that appears when you choose "More Options." It is identical to clicking the Save Options button."Quit" stops PrintPanel, and closes the window.The Other Tools menu contains one choice, "PrintStatus." Choose a printer in the Available printers list, then choose "PrintStatus" to see the printer's queue and status information. You can also double-click a printer name in the list to see its PrintStatus window.The Help menu contains a list of help topics. Choose a topic to see online help.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_selectFile"Selecting Files to PrintYou can select a file to print in three ways:Drag the file onto the PrintPanel icon.Type the full pathname of the file in the Files to print field.You can print several files at once by typing in more than one pathname. Be sure to separate each pathname with a space.Choose "Open..." from the File menu to see the File Open window. It lets you browse through the filesystem and select a file.In this window, you can double-click a directory to open it, and its name will appear in the Selection field. You can also type a pathname directly into the field. When the file you want to open appears in the field, click the OK button.Click the Filter button to search for a specific set of files. By default, the system looks for all directories and files, noted with a filter of * (the wildcard character). To search instead for all files that end in .doc, enter *.doc in the Filter window.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_selectPrinter"Selecting a PrinterThe Available printers list shows all printers that a Privileged User has installed using the Printer Manager (see IDREF="46932" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch3.doc" HDG="""Setting Up Printer Connections").Click a printer to select it. If you want more information about a printer, double-click it to see its PrintStatus window.When you choose "Print" from the File menu or click the Print button, the job goes to the printer that you selected.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_noCopies"Specifying the Number of Copies to PrintID="ch4B14"Specify the number of copies you want to print by highlighting the number in the  Number of copies field, and typing a new number. You can also click the up or down arrows next to this field to increase or decrease the number.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_banner"Setting the Banner Page Title OptionsID="ch4B15"By default, the printer prints a banner page before printing your job. The banner page includes your login name and system name. To change the title that appears at the top of the page, click the box next to Custom under Banner page title, then type a new title in the field.If the More Options button is available, you can eliminate the banner page. See IDREF="89039" TYPE="TITLE""Setting Printer-Specific Options."LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_jobComplete"Setting Job Completion OptionsPrintPanel reports when the job is finished by either sending a message to your Console window or sending you electronic mail. Click the box next to Send mail or Send message to console to specify how you would like to be notified. If you do not want to be notified, leave both check boxes empty.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_jobProcess"Setting Job Handling OptionsTo keep PrintPanel from creating a temporary copy of the job (and from using up disk space), under Print file handling choose Link in spool directory. To have PrintPanel create the copy so you can safely edit or delete the original file while it's being printed, choose Copy to spool directory.LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_advancedOptions"ID="89039"Setting Printer-Specific OptionsThe Printer-specific options field is filled in automatically when you set advanced printing options using the More Options button or menu choice. If you are familiar with the IRIX lp command, you may enter lp command line options in this field.To change advanced, printer-specific settings and print a file with the new settings, follow these steps:Drag the file onto the PrintPanel icon; or start PrintPanel by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/printpanel -F" PARMS=""Print Panel
 now, then typing a file name in the Files to print field.Select a printer by clicking it in the Available printers list, then click the More Options button. You see an Options window. There is a scroll bar on the right side of the display area that you must slide down to reveal all options.Change the settings. See IDREF="63198" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Printer Settings for All File Types,"IDREF="47085" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Printer Settings for PostScript Files,"IDREF="46124" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Printer Settings for Image Files," and IDREF="18622" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Printer Settings for ASCII Text Files."Confirm or cancel the new settings.To confirm that the settings are correct and to make the Options window disappear, click OK.To confirm that the settings are correct and to keep the Options window displayed, click Apply.To cancel the new settings and to make the Options window disappear, click Cancel.To save these settings so they become your default settings for the printer that is selected, and to save the settings on the PrintPanel so they are the default settings for all printers, click Save in the main PrintPanel. See also IDREF="57846" TYPE="TITLE""Saving Printing Options."Note the Printer-specific options field on the main PrintPanel; it contains command line arguments that represent the settings that you changed in the Options window.NoteThe Administrator can specify default printer settings for all users, but individual users can override them for their own print jobs; see chapter 6 of the online Impressario User's Guide for details.To print the file using the new settings, click Print on the main PrintPanel. PrintPanel sends the job to the printer and the PrintPanel window disappears.LBL="" HELPID="impress_generalSettings"ID="63198"Changing Printer Settings for All File TypesGeneral printing settings apply to all three file formats that Impressario supports. They often include:Paper SizeSpecify the size of paper in the printer's paper tray by clicking the box next to A ( 8.5x11-inch), A4 (European A-size) or Legal (8.5x14-inch).Printer ResolutionSome printers can print at a range of resolutions. The lower the resolution, the poorer the quality of the printed image. Print Banner PageSpecify whether to print a banner page as page one of the job. Click in the Yes box if you want a banner page; click in the No box if you don't.Verbose LoggingSpecify whether to report the details of all printing activity in the /var/spool/lp/log file. Click in the On box to activate verbose logging; click in the Off box to eliminate it.Depending on the printer's type and model, more general options may be available; for example, you may be able to specify whether to print in color or in black and white.LBL="" HELPID="impress_postscriptSettings"ID="47085"Changing Printer Settings for PostScript FilesID="ch4B16"PostScript printing options apply only to PostScript files that conform to the Adobe structuring conventions; they do not apply to Image files or to ASCII text files. (See IDREF="18622" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Printer Settings for ASCII Text Files" for information on processing ASCII text files as if they were PostScript.)PostScript printing options include:Page Ordering Normal prints so that page one is the first page of the job; Reversed makes page one the last page. Click the box next to the option that you prefer.Page RangeLets you print all pages or a subset of pages and, within the range you select, lets you print only even or only odd pages.To print all pages, click the box next to All.To print all odd pages in the file, click the boxes next to All and Odd Pages Only; to print all even pages, click the boxes next to All and Even Pages Only.To print a subset of pages, click the box next to From, then type the starting page and ending page in the fields.To print all odd pages within this subset of pages, click the box next to Odd Pages Only; to print all even pages within the subset, click the box next to Even Pages Only.LBL="" HELPID="impress_imageSettings"ID="46124"Changing Printer Settings for Image FilesID="ch4B17"The options for printing Image files let you control the orientation, lightness, and size of the printed image. These options apply only to files in the Image format; they do not apply to PostScript or ASCII text files.To change the orientation of the image on the page, change one or more of these settings:Mirror ImageClick Yes to flip the image horizontally.RotateClick the box next to Best Fit to automatically rotate and scale the image so that it is printed as large as possible on the page.Click the box next to Angle and type in the number of degrees you would like to rotate the image. The image rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, so typing 90 in this field rotates the image 90 degrees to the left.To change the size of the image, change one or more of these Scaling settings:NoneClick this box to make the image on the page contain the same number of dots as the image on the screen. This makes the image on the page appear smaller than the image on the screen, since most printers print smaller dots (that is, print with higher resolution) than the screen can display. If the image is larger than the page, only the portion of the image that fits on the page will be printed.ResolutionThe resolution of an image is the number of dots per inch (dpi) that are in the image. The larger this number is, the smaller the dots are in the image. By default, the resolution of your printer appears in this field. To make the printed image the same size as the image on your screen, enter the resolution of your screen in this field. To find the resolution of your screen, type the following command in a shell window:/usr/bin/X11/xdpyinfo | grep resolutionIf your screen's resolution is 72 dpi, you see this message:72x72 dots per inchIf your screen's resolution is 96 dpi, you see this message:96x96 dots per inchWhen printing an image that you originally scanned in, you can match the size of the image to the original by entering the resolution at which you scanned in the original. Page FillSpecify what percentage of the printed page your image should occupy. Impressario scales and centers the image to fit. LBL="" HELPID="impress_asciiSettings"ID="18622"Changing Printer Settings for ASCII Text FilesID="ch4B18"The Options window lets you change a plain ASCII text file into a formatted PostScript file. Click the Yes box next to FormatText and several options become available.NoteOnly the settings that you change under Text File Options in the Options window affect ASCII text files. The PostScript File Options that appear earlier in the window (Page Ordering and Page Range) affect only those files whose native format is PostScript.To change the layout of the text on the page, change these settings:OrientationClick Portrait to orient your text vertically (the way the text of this document is oriented); click Landscape to orient it horizontally.Columns Per PageClick the box next to the number of columns you would like; all columns are the same width, with approximately a 1/8" margin between them. Your text will flow from one column to the next.MarginsType a number in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right fields to change the page margins.To change the font style and size, change these settings:FontClick any font that appears in the scrolling list (the fonts listed are those installed on the printer host). SizeClick any font size.To include page numbers or change the order in which the pages are printed, change these settings:Page OrderingNormal prints so that page one is the first page of the job; Reversed makes page one the last page. Click the box next to the option that you prefer.Page NumberingLets you include a page number on each printed page. Choose where you want the page number to appear by selecting an item from the Page Numbering menu button. Enter the number you want to begin with in the field labeled "Start numbers at."LBL="" HELPID="printpanel_saveOptions"ID="57846"Saving Printing OptionsThe Save Options button in the PrintPanel window saves two groups of settings:The settings in the main PrintPanel window, which apply to all printers shown in the list of available printers; this information is saved in the .glprc file in your home directory.The settings that you change in the Options window for the selected printer (the printer whose name is highlighted in the Available printers list); these settings are saved in a file named /var/spool/lp/settings/<printername>/<username>.NoteThis second group of settings is available only for Impressario printers; see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario."When you save these settings, they apply only to jobs that you submit to the printer; they do not apply to jobs that other users submit. The Administrator can change system default settings for a printer, but any user can override these settings for their own jobs.To save printer-specific settings (available only for Impressario printers), follow these steps:When the settings in the Options window are correct, click the OK or Apply button.In the PrintPanel window, click the Save button. You see the Save Settings window, which shows a list of all printers whose settings you have changed during this session with PrintPanel.In the Save Settings window, select the printer(s) whose settings you want to save, then click the Save button.NoteIf you are a Privileged User, you see two buttons for saving: Save-Personal saves the settings only for you; Save-All Users saves the settings for all users.The settings that apply to all printers and the printer-specific options are now saved. These settings will be in effect the next time you print a job from the desktop or from an application program.Now you can either print the file that is specified in the Files to print field by clicking the Print button, or you can dismiss the PrintPanel window by choosing "Quit" from the File menu.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="19205"Monitoring Print Jobs and PrintersID="ch4B19"PrintStatus alllows you to monitor print jobs and printers. You can start PrintStatus in several ways:Double-click a printer icon on the desktop (see IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons").Select a printer and choose "PrintStatus" from the Other Tools menu in PrintPanel (see IDREF="24334" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintPanel").Select a printer and choose "Show Queue" from the Printer menu in the Printer Manager (see IDREF="90872" TYPE="TITLE""About the Printer Manager").Choose a printer in the "PrintStatus for" rollover menu in the Other Tools menu in PrintStatus. (This works only if you have more than one printer available.)LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_overview"Overview of PrintStatusPrintStatus lets any User view a printer's queue, and cancel jobs that the user has submitted. A Privileged User can cancel jobs submitted by any use and can also enable or disable the printer's queue. The Administrator can forward a selected job to another printer.The top portion of the PrintStatus window shows the printer's model, location code and location description, and the system to which it is physically connected.The Current Printer Status is active only for Impressario printers (see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario"). It displays messages about the physical printer itself. It shows what the printer is currently doing, gives detailed information about any printer problems, and reports the version of the printer driver.The Printer Request Queue area shows the list of all jobs that are waiting to be printed. It lists the job's title, its owner (the person who sent the job), its size (in kilobytes), and its  ID number. When the top job in the queue disappears, that job has been printed. LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_menus"About the MenusThe Printer menu offers these choices:"Send Test Page" sends a one-page test file to the printer."Update Printer Status" checks the printer and displays its current status in the Current Printer Status area (only for Impressario printers; see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario")."Quit" dismisses the PrintStatus window. The Queue menu offers these choices: "Cancel Selected Job" removes the job that you have selected from the queue."Move Print Job to Another Printer" is a rollover menu. The Administrator can forward the selected job to one of the printers on the rollover menu."Printer Accepting/Printing Your Queued Jobs" shows whether the printer is able to accept jobs into its queue and/or print them. Only the Administrator can disable the printer through this menu.NoteIf you check the queue of a remote printer and see that jobs are not disappearing from the queue, the Administrator of the system to which the printer is connected may have disabled the printer using this menu choice. The Other Tools menu offers these choices: "PrintPanel" starts PrintPanel with no file specified for printing. PrintPanel has help available through its Help menu."Printer Manager" starts the Printer Manager that you usually start from the System toolchest. The Printer Manager has help available through its Help menu."PrintStatus for" starts PrintStatus for another printer. A menu of printers appears to the right of the arrow; choose a printer to see its PrintStatus window. LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_viewQueue"ID="60632"Viewing the Queue of Print JobsYou can start PrintStatus to check a printer's queue in several ways:Double-click a printer icon on the desktop (see IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons").Select a printer and choose "PrintStatus" from the Other Tools menu in PrintPanel (see IDREF="24334" TYPE="TITLE""About PrintPanel").Select a printer and choose "Show Queue" from the Printer menu in the Printer Manager (see IDREF="90872" TYPE="TITLE""About the Printer Manager").Choose a printer in the "PrintStatus for" rollover menu in the Other Tools menu in PrintStatus. (This works only if you have more than one printer available.)The Printer Request Queue area shows the list of all jobs that are waiting to be printed. It lists the job ID number, the owner (the person who sent the job), and the size (in kilobytes). When the top job in the queue disappears, that job has been printed. LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_cancelJob"ID="18104"Cancelling a Print JobID="ch4B20"Any User can cancel his own print job using PrintStatus. Follow these steps:Double-click the printer icon to open its PrintStatus window (or use one of the other methods for starting PrintStatus described in IDREF="60632" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Queue of Print Jobs.")Click on a job in the Printer Request Queue to select it.Choose "Cancel Selected Job" from the Queue menu.A Privileged User can cancel any job in the same way.LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_forwardJob"Forwarding a Print JobThe Adminstrator can forward a job to a different printer.Double-click the printer icon to open its PrintStatus window. (You can also use one of the other methods for starting PrintStatus described in IDREF="60632" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Queue of Print Jobs.")Click on a job in the Printer Request Queue to select it.Open the Queue menu, then choose a printer from the Move Print Job to Another Printer rollover menu.LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_disableQueue"Disabling or Enabling a Printer's QueueA Privileged User can stop a printer from accepting new print jobs into its queue, and can stop the printer from printing jobs that are already in the queue.Double-click the printer icon to open its PrintStatus window. (You can also use one of the other methods for starting PrintStatus described in IDREF="60632" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Queue of Print Jobs.")To keep new jobs from entering the queue, choose "Printer Accepting Your Jobs" from the Queue menu to make the check mark in the box next to this choice disappear. To accept jobs, choose "Printer Accepting Your Jobs" again to make the check box appear.To keep jobs that are already in the queue from being printed, choose "Printer Printing Your Queued Jobs" from the Queue menu to make the check mark in the box next to this choice disappear. To allow jobs to be printed, choose "Printer Printing Your Queued Jobs" again to make the check box appear.NoteIf you are checking the queue of a remote printer and jobs are not disappearing from the queue, the Administrator of the system to which the printer is connected may have disabled the printer using either of these menu choices.LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_checkStatus"Checking the Status of a PrinterOnly Impressario printers can report printer status (see IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario"). With these printers, you can check a printer's status in two ways:Double-click the printer icon to open its PrintStatus window. (You can also use one of the other methods for starting PrintStatus described in IDREF="60632" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Queue of Print Jobs.")If the window has been open for a while, you can update the status information by choosing "Update Printer Status" from the Printer menu.For printers that don't use Impressario, the Current Printer Status area is empty.Monitor the printer's desktop icon; it changes to show when a printer is idle, busy, or broken (see IDREF="76676" TYPE="TITLE""About Desktop Printer Icons" ).Icons representing printers that don't use Impressario do not change.LBL="" HELPID="printstatus_testPrinter"Testing a PrinterID="ch4B21"To send a test page to a printer, follow these steps:Double-click the printer icon to open its PrintStatus window. (You can also use one of the other methods for starting PrintStatus described in IDREF="60632" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Queue of Print Jobs.")Choose "Send Test Page" from the Printer menu.If the jobs that are ahead of the test page in the queue do not exit from the queue in a reasonable period of time, there may be a problem with the printer. Cancel the jobs in the queue, and resend the test page. If you still have problems, see IDREF="98066" TYPE="TITLE""Troubleshooting Printing".LBL="" HELPID=""ID="88221"Designating a Default PrinterID="ch4B22"From the desktop, users can send files to a particular printer in two ways: Select a file and choose "Print" from the Selected toolchest or menu. The system sends the file to the printer that a Privileged User has designated as the default printer for the system.Drag a file onto a specific printer, or drag a file onto PrintPanel and specify a printer. The system sends the file to that printer.If only one printer appears in your Printer Manager, it is automatically the default printer. If several printers appear, a Privileged User can designate a default printer for all users on the system by following these steps:Start the Printer Manager by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/printers" PARMS=""Printer Manager
 now, or by choosing 
"Printer Manager" from the System toolchest.Select the printer icon, then choose "Set Default" from the Printer menu or click the Default button. A label appears above the list of printers that indicates which printer is the system default.LBL="" HELPID="print_troubleshoot"ID="98066"Troubleshooting PrintingID="ch4B23"If your job reached the printer's queue but isn't printing, follow these steps:Cancel the job (see IDREF="18104" TYPE="TITLE""Cancelling a Print Job").Start the Printer Manager by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/printers" PARMS=""Printer Manager
 now, or by choosing 
"Printer Manager" from the System toolchest.Select the printer icon, then choose "Send Test Page" from the Printer menu. If the printer doesn't print the test job, see IDREF="48006" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch8.doc" HDG="""Troubleshooting Standard Printing Problems."When you drag a file onto a remote Impressario printer (see also IDREF="66378" TYPE="TITLE""About Impressario") you may see an error message that says:Cannot print. No convert rule for: filename of type: type, resubmit from the shell.This means your system doesn't have the correct filter to print the file, but the system to which the printer is connected does have the filter (see also IDREF="70177" TYPE="TITLE""About File Format Filters"). To submit the job again, follow these steps:On your own system, choose "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.In the window that appears, type:lp filename -dprinternamewhere filename is the name of your file, and printername is the name of the printer.To close the window, type:logoutIf you encounter other problems printing, see the detailed information in IDREF="48006" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch8.doc" HDG="""Troubleshooting Standard Printing Problems."LBL="6"ID="57574"Managing IconsThis chapter explains how to find icons and organize them so they are easily accessible. It contains:IDREF="96395" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Command"IDREF="60468" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the Search Tool"IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons"IDREF="82483" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing and Arranging Icons"LBL="" HELPID="fetch_help"ID="96395"Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" CommandID="ch51"The 
"Find an Icon" command opens a small window into which you can type the name of applications, files, and directories whose icons you want to find. You can use it to find icons on your system or icons on another system on your network. (If you do not know the full name of the icon you want to find, or you want to find an icon based on additional characteristics, such as its type or owner, use the Search tool instead.)Use the controls below the movie window to view a short movie showing how to use the "Find an Icon" command.TYPE="SGIVIDEO" PARM1="find1.mv"LBL=""Media  Movie showing how to use "Find an Icon"Click a topic for step-by-step instructions on using "Find an Icon":IDREF="19341" TYPE="TITLE""Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Your System"IDREF="79892" TYPE="TITLE""Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Another System"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="19341"Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Your SystemIf the Find an Icon window is not already open, choose "an Icon" from the Find toolchest.Type the name of a file, directory, or application in the type-in field provided.If the file or folder icon resides in your home directory or search path, type the icon name only. For example, to fetch the icon for a file named report1 in your home directory, type: report1If the file or folder icon is not in your home directory or search path, include the full Unix pathname. For example, if you want to find the folder icon for the /usr/tmp directory, type /usr/tmp in the field provided. If you want to find the icon for a file called report1 in the /usr/tmp directory, type: /usr/tmp/report1Press the <
Enter> key. This places the icon name on the recycle list. If you need to find the icon again, and the Find an Icon window is still open, place the cursor over the recycle button; then press the left mouse button.When the icon appears in the drop pocket, double-click to open the icon, or drag the icon to a different locationname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'such as the desktop or a page in the Icon Catalogname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'so it is easily accessible.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="79892"Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Another SystemID="ch52"If the Find an Icon window is not already open, choose "an Icon" from the Find toolchest.In the type-in field, type /hosts/remotemachinename followed by the pathname of the file, directory, or application whose icon you want to find. If the system is in a different domain of the network, include this after the hostname. For example, if you want to find the icon for jot on a machine named wizard in the bldg2 domain, type: /hosts/wizard.bldg2/usr/sbin/jotPress the <
Enter> key. This places the icon name on the recycle list. If you need to find the icon again, and the Find an Icon window is still open, place the cursor over the recycle button; then press the left mouse button.When the icon appears in the drop pocket, double-click to open the icon, or drag the icon to a different locationname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'such as the desktop or an Icon Catalog pagename='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'so it is easily accessible.If an icon does not appear, you can not search the directory that contains the icon you have specified. You may be unable to search for one of several reasons: The directory is marked as private; the owner has not set it up as a shared directory. See IDREF="51251" TYPE="TITLE""Overview of Sharing a Directory" for more details.The permission settings prevent you from searching the directory. See IDREF="24489" TYPE="TITLE""Permissions Settings: A Definition" for more information on permission settings.NoteThe remote search capability will not work if  automount, a system setting, is disabled. To check this setting, open a shell window by choosing "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest. In the shell window, type: chkconfig Look for the word "automount" in the left column.If automount is enabled, the word "on" appears in the right column. If it is disabled, the word "off" appears. Contact the Administrator if the setting needs to be changed.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="60468"Finding Icons Using the Search ToolID="ch53"The Search tool helps you find icons that you want to use. You can findicons for files, directories, and applicationsicons for printers, tape drives, and disk drives that are connected to your system or another system on the networkicons that represent other systems on your networkicons that represent other system usersThe controls for performing each type of search are stored on a page. By default the Search tool contains six pagesname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'one each for finding files, printers, tape drives, disk drives, users, and other systems on the network. Each page is marked with a labeled tab.LBL="" HELPID="srch_findfileover"Finding Files: An OverviewID="ch54"If you do not remember the name of a file or the directory in which it's stored, you may have to search for it. You can use the Search tool to find files and directories based onthe filename, or a portion of the namethe type of icon it hashow recently the file was created or modifiedthe person who owns the filethe size of the filethe permission settings for the file (permission settings specify whether people can view and edit the file)the text in an ASCII text fileBy default, the Search tool searches for files that are located on your system. It does not search in remote directories whose icons you have placed on your desktop (mounted). To search in mounted directories, click the box next to the label only on this host. The checkmark disappears. To search for files on another system, see IDREF="32812" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Files on Another System."LBL="" HELPID="srch_findfilebasic"ID="86865"Finding Files: Basic InstructionsID="ch55"If you do not remember the name of a file or the directory in which it's stored, you may want to use the Search tool to locate it. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
, or by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled Files to display the controls for finding files and directories. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Files isn't visible. The correct controls are displayed when the top of the window says "Search for files."By default, the Search tool shows two fields: one for specifying the file name and one for specifying the directories that you want to search.Type the name, or a portion of the name, in the field next to the label "whose name." By default, the Search tool finds files whose name contains the string you type. For example, suppose you type doc. You find all files whose name contains that sequence of characters, regardless of the capitalization.If you want to find files that match a particular name, you need to change the setting from "contains string" to "matches pattern." To do so, place the cursor over the menu button labeled contains string; then press the left mouse button. Choose "matches pattern." Now, if you type "doc," you only find files named doc.NoteWhen you select "matches pattern," you can use an asterisk (*). The asterisk is called a wildcard character. For example, type *doc and you find all files that end in doc. Do not include an asterisk if the Search tool is set to "contains string." The Search tool will look for a file name that includes the asterisk.In the field next to the label "look," type the name of the directory from which you want to start the search. By default, your home directory name appears.Choose commands from the Match menu to specify what type of files you want to find. Each command on the Match menu reveals a new set of controls. To hide the controls, choose "is ignored" from the menu button that appears next to the label.Choose "Icon" to specify the type of file you want to find. For example, if you're looking for a file you created using the IRIS Showcase application, you can specify that you want to find all IRIS Showcase files. See also IDREF="62616" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Files of a Particular Type" and IDREF="84751" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Directories."Choose "Time" to find files based on the time and date they were created or modified. A menu button appears. It lets you specify whether you want to find files that are older than or newer than a certain number of days, or older than or newer than a specified file. Choose "newer than file" or "older than file" and a drop pocket appears. Choose "Ownership" to find files that are owned by a particular user. A drop pocket and type-in field appear. Enter the name of the user or drop an icon into the drop pocket. If the user's icon is available, drop that into the drop pocket. You can also find one file that is owned by that person, and place its icon in the drop pocket.Choose "Size" to find files that are greater than, less than, or equal to a specified size. Several menu buttons and a type-in field appear. See also IDREF="66471" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Large Files."Choose "Permissions" to find files based on their permission settings. A menu button appears. It offers two choices. You can find files that are marked read-only (allow only reading) or files that are editable (allow reading and writing).Choose "Content" to find an ASCII text file that contains a specified sequence of characters.A type-in field appears. Type exactly the text that you want to find. Do not use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard character. For example, if you type *.doc you will only find files that actually contain the text string "*.doc." Press the Search button.A list of icons that meet the search criteria appears in the lower portion of the window.NoteBy default, the Search tool searches for files that are located on your system. It does not search in remote directories whose icons you have placed on your desktop (mounted). To search these directories, click the box next to the label "only on this host." The checkmark disappears.LBL="" HELPID="srch_findpig"ID="66471"Finding Large FilesID="ch56"You can use the Search tool to find files that are smaller than, greater than, or equal to a specified size. If the System Monitor warns you that your disk is getting full, you might want to use the Search tool to locate large files. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled Files to display the controls for finding files and directories. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Files isn't visible. The correct controls are displayed when the top of the window says "Search for files." By default, the Search tool shows two fields: one for specifying the file name and one for specifying the directories that you want to search.Leave the field next to the label "whose name" empty. This assures that you'll find all large files, regardless of their names. You have another option: choose "ignore" from the menu button. When you choose "ignore," the controls for specifying a name disappear. To open them again, choose "Name" from the Match menu.In the field next to the label "look," type the name of the directory from which you want to start the search. By default, your home directory name appears.Choose "Size" from the Match menu.A new area appears. It includes two menu buttons. One lets you choose whether you want to find files that are greater than, equal to, or smaller than a specified size; the other lets you choose what measurements you want to usename='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'megabytes, bytes, blocks, or kilobytes. Choose "`is greater than" from the menu button next to the label "and size." Type a number in the pink type-in field.Click the Search button.Icons greater than the specified size appear in the results area. NoteYou can delete files to make more room on your system's disk. Before doing so, consider making a backup copy of these files. For instructions, see IDREF="34227" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch7.doc" HDG="""Backing Up and Restoring Files" in the Personal System Administration Guide.LBL="" HELPID="srch_findicontype"ID="62616"Finding Files of a Particular TypeID="ch57"You can use the Search tool to find files of a particular typename='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'directories, audio files, IRIS Showcase files, text files, or image files, for example. A unique icon identifies each of these file types. For this example, suppose you want to use the Search tool to find an IRIS Showcase file. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled Files to display the controls for finding files and directories. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Files isn't visible. The correct controls are displayed when the top of the window says "Search for files." By default, the Search tool shows two fields: one for specifying the file name and one for specifying the directories that you want to search.Leave the field next to the label "whose name" empty. This assures that you'll find all files, regardless of their names. You have another option: choose "ignore" from the menu button. When you choose "ignore," the controls for specifying a name disappear. To open them again, choose "Name" from the Match menu.In the field next to the label "look," type the name of the directory from which you want to start the search. By default, your home directory name appears.Choose "Icon" from the Match menu. A new area appears in the window.Drag an icon of the type for which you are searching, and drop it into the drop pocket. For example, if you want to find a particular IRIS Showcase file, drag an IRIS Showcase file icon and place it in the drop pocket. The icon changes and the name of that filetype appears in the pink field.Press the Search button.A list of files appears in the lower portion of the window. In this case, all of the files on the list are IRIS Showcase files.LBL="" HELPID="srch_remotesystem"ID="32812"Finding Files on Another SystemID="ch58"If your system is part of a network, you can use the Search tool to find files on other systems. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled Files to display the controls for finding files and directories. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Files isn't visible. The correct controls are displayed when the top of the window says "Search for a file." By default, the Search tool shows two fields: one for specifying the file name and one for specifying the directories that you want to search.Type the name of the file you want to find in the field next to the label "whose name." For more details, see IDREF="86865" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Files: Basic Instructions."In the field next to the label "look," type /hosts followed by the name of the system and directory in which you want to search. If the system is in a different domain of the network, include this after the system name. For example, to search in the /usr/tmp directory on a system named wizard in the .bldg2 domain, type: /hosts/wizard.bldg2/usr/tmpA folder icon should appear in the drop pocket next to the pathname you type. If it does not appear, you can not search the directory you have specified. You may be unable to search for one of several reasons: The directory is marked as private; the owner has not set it up as a shared directory. See IDREF="51251" TYPE="TITLE""Overview of Sharing a Directory" for more details.The permission settings prevent you from searching the directory. See IDREF="24489" TYPE="TITLE""Permissions Settings: A Definition" for more information on permission settings.Choose commands from the Match menu to narrow the search to specific types of files. Each command on the Match menu reveals a new set of controls. See IDREF="86865" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Files: Basic Instructions" for more details.Press the Search button.A list of files that meet the search criteria appears in the lower portion of the window.  If you need to access a remote file frequently, drag the icon onto the desktop, onto a shelf, or onto a page in the Icon Catalog. This gives you quick access to a file on another system. To make a copy of the file, drag it into an open Directory View window or over a folder icon.LBL="" HELPID="srch_finddir"ID="84751"Finding DirectoriesID="ch59"You can use the Search tool to find files, directories, and applications based on their name, size, owner, and more. In addition, you can narrow the search so that the Search tool only finds directories that meet the search criteria. (If the Search tool is not already showing, clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled Files to display the controls for finding files and directories. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Files isn't visible. The correct controls are displayed when the top of the window says "Search for a file." By default, the Search tool shows two fields: one for specifying the file name and one for specifying the directories that you want to search.Type the name, or a portion of the name, in the field next to the label "whose name." For more details, see IDREF="86865" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Files: Basic Instructions."In the field next to the label "look," type the name of the directory from which you want to start the search. By default, your home directory name appears.Choose "Icon" from the Match menu. A new area appears in the window.Type "Directory" in the type-in field or drag a folder icon into the drop pocket. The drop pocket displays a folder icon and the word "Directory" appears in the pink field.Press the Search button.A list of directories appears in the lower portion of the window.LBL="" HELPID="srch_findprinters"ID="78172"Finding a Printer IconID="ch510"To print a file, you can drag a file icon and drop it onto a printer icon. Use the Search tool to find icons for printers that are connected to your computer or are connected to a computer on your network. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Printers" from the Find toolchest.) Click the tab labeled Printers to display the controls for finding printers. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Printers isn't visible. The correct controls are showing when the top of the window says "Search for printers."If you know the name of the printer whose icon you want to find, type the name in the field next to the label "whose name."By default, the Search tool finds printers whose name contains the string you type. For example, suppose you type doc. You find all printers whose name contains that sequence of characters, regardless of the capitalization.If you want to find printers that match a particular name, you need to change the setting from "contains string" to "matches pattern." To do so, place the cursor over the button labeled contains string; then press the left mouse button. Choose "matches pattern" from the menu that appears. Now, if you type "doc," you only find printers named doc.Choose commands from the Match menu to specify what type of printers you want to find. Choose "Color" to specify whether the printer is black and white or color.Choose "Input Format" to specify what type of files the printer accepts. Your choices are "handles postscript," "handles bitmaps," or "handles plotting."Choose "Resolution" to specify the resolution of the printer. You can specify  the dots per inch, and then ask to find printers whose resolution matches that number, is greater than that number, or is less than that number.Choose "Location" to find printers based on the physical location of the printer. When you use the Printer Manager to set up your system to recognize a new printer, you can specify a code and description for the printer's location. The Search tool can make a match based on the location code.Fill in the new fields that appear.Press the Search button.A list of icons that meet the search criteria appears in the lower portion of the window. Now you can drag the printer icon and drop it onto the desktop so it is easily accessible.LBL="" HELPID="srch_finduser"ID="20262"Finding Another User's IconID="ch511"Each person who uses the system should have his or her own login account. The login account contains information about the username='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'such as the person's full name and job titlename='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'and a picture of the person. The picture represents the person's account as an icon in the desktop and when you want information about a person, you double-click the person's icon to see the electronic business card. You can use the Search tool to find icons for other users on your network. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "People" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled People to display the controls for finding icons that represent other people with login accounts on the system. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled People isn't visible. The correct controls are showing when the top of the window says "Search for people."If you know the person's login name, type the name in the field next to the label "whose login name." Type the name, or a portion of the name, and the Search tool finds all users whose login name contains that string of characters. For example, type jim, and you find all users whose login names contain the string jim (for example., jim, jimt, tjim, and so on).To match a particular name, you need to change the setting from "contains string" to "matches pattern." To do so, place the cursor over the button labeled contains string; then press the left mouse button. Choose "matches pattern" from the menu that appears. Now, if you type "jim," you only find users named jim.Choose commands from the Match menu to find users based on other information they have put on their electronic business card.Choose "Name" to specify the person's full name. Choose "Organization" to specify the name of the organization the person placed on the electronic business card. Choose "Job Title" to specify the job title the person placed on the electronic business card.Press the Search button.A list of user icons appears in the lower portion of the window. This list does not include icons for default login accounts such as root, guest, and EZsetup. If you want the Search tool to find such accounts, click the box next to the label ignore default users in the upper right corner of the window. The checkmark disappears.LBL="" HELPID="srch_findtape"ID="88420"Finding a Tape DriveID="ch512"You can use a tape drive to install software and copy and retrieve files. Use the Search tool to find icons for tape drives that are connected to systems on your network. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Tape Drives" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled TapeDrives to display the controls for finding other systems on the network. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Tape Drives isn't visible. The correct controls are showing when the top of the window says "Search for tape drives."Place the cursor over the menu button labeled whose type, press the left mouse button, and then choose an entry from the menu that appears.Choose commands from the Match menu to find drives based on other informationChoose "Loaded" to specify whether the drive is loaded with a tape or is empty.Choose "Location" to specify the location of the system that contains the drive. The Search tool compares this to information stored by the System Manager.Choose settings from the menu buttons that appear.To choose an item from a menu button, place the cursor over the button; then press the left mouse button to reveal a menu.Press the Search button.A list of tape drive icons that meet the search criteria appears in the lower portion of the window. Now you can drag the tape icon and place it on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog so you can access it easily.LBL="" HELPID="srch_finddisk"ID="64690"Finding a Disk DriveID="ch513"Use the Search tool to find the icons for CD-ROM drives, floppy drives, and floptical drives that are attached to systems on your network. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Disk Drives" from the Find toolchest.)Click the tab labeled DiskDrives to display the controls for finding other systems on the network. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Disk Drives isn't visible. The correct controls are showing when the top of the window says "Search for disk drives."Choose the type of disk drive that you want to find: CD-ROM, floppy disk drive, floptical disk drive, or SCSI disk drive.Place the cursor over the menu button next to whose type; then press the left mouse button.Choose an entry from the menu that appears.Choose commands from the Match menu to find disk drives based on other information about the disk drive.Choose "Size" to specify the size of the disk drive.Choose "Loaded" to specify whether the drive is loaded with media, such as a tape or compact disc, or is empty.Choose "Format" to specify the type of data the disk drive contains. Your choices are: music, photo CD, DOS, Mac, EFS, NFS, or ISO 9660.Choose "Location" to specify the location of the system that contains the drive. The Search tool compares this to information stored by the System Manager.Fill in the necessary fields and choose settings from the menu buttons.To choose an item from a menu button, place the cursor over the button next to the new field that appears; then press the left mouse button to reveal a menu.Press the Search button.A list of disk drive icons that meet the search criteria appears in the lower portion of the window. Now you can drag the drive icon and place it on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog so you can access it easily.LBL="" HELPID="srch_findhost"ID="99261"Finding Another System on the NetworkID="ch514"If your system is part of a network, you can use resources such as files, disk drives, and printers that are on other systems in the network. Use the Search tool to find out what systems are available. (If the Search tool is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Search tool
 now, or by choosing "Hosts" from the Find toolchest.) Click the tab labeled Hosts to display the controls for finding other systems on the network. See IDREF="78882" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Pages in the Search Tool" if the tab labeled Hosts isn't visible. The correct controls are showing when the top of the window says "Search for hosts."If you know the name of the system whose icon you want to find, type the name, or a portion of the name, in the field next to the label "whose name."By default, the Search tool finds systems whose name contains the string you type. For example, suppose you type doc. You find all systems whose name contains that sequence of characters, regardless of the capitalization.If you want to find systems that match a particular name, you need to change the setting from "contains string" to "matches pattern." To do so, place the cursor over the button labeled contains string; then press the left mouse button. Choose "matches pattern" from the menu that appears. Now, if you type "doc," you only find systems named doc.Leave the field blank if you want to find all systems, regardless of name.Choose commands from the Match menu to narrow the search to certain types of systems.Choose "Model" to specify which model of Silicon Graphics systems you want to find. A menu button lists the available models.Choose "Memory" to specify the amount of memory the system contains.Fill in the necessary fields and choose settings from the menu buttons.To choose an item from a menu button, place the cursor over the button next to the new field that appears; then press the left mouse button to reveal a menu.Press the Search button.A list of system icons that meet the search criteria appears in the lower portion of the window. Now you can drag the system icon and place it on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog so you can access it easily.LBL="" HELPID="srch_newsearch"Creating and Saving a Custom SearchID="ch515"The controls for performing a specific type of search are stored on a page. By default the Search tool contains six pagesname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'one each for finding files, printers, tape drives, disk drives, system users, and other systems on the network. If you perform a specific search periodically, consider adding a new page to the tool. For example, suppose you use a software application that automatically creates a backup copy of the file you are editing. It names these files filename.bak. This protects you from losing information if the program quits unexpectedly. To regain disk space, you might want to find old backup files and delete them periodically. Choose "File Search" from the New rollover menu on the Page menu in the Search tool.A new page appears. The title bar and tab display the label "Files1." This number increases each time you choose "File Search."Type .bak in the field next to "whose name."By default, the Search tool finds files that contain the string of characters you specify. If you type .bak, you find all files that contain the sequence of characters ".bak."If you've changed the setting to "matches pattern," you need to type *.bak. The asterisk is a wild card. You find all files that end with .bak.Make sure the full pathname of your home directory appears in the field next to the label "look."Choose "Time" from the Match menu.A menu button and new type-in field appear.Choose "...days or older" from the menu button.To choose an item from a menu button, place the cursor over the button next to the label "and time"; then press the left mouse button to reveal the menu.Type 7 in the field next to the button.This specifies that you want to find files that end in .bak and are more than seven days old.Press the Search button.You see a list of .bak files that are more than seven days old.Choose "Rename" from the Page menu; then type a new name in the window that appears. For this example, suppose you type "OldFiles."Now when you want to find these files, you can click the tab labeled "OldFiles."LBL="" HELPID="srch_turnpages"ID="78882"Turning Pages in the Search ToolID="ch516"The controls for performing a specific type of search are stored on a page. To turn from one page to another, place the cursor over the tab; then click the left mouse button. You move to that page.Some of the tabs might not fit in the space provided. When this happens, a stack of unnumbered tabs appears at the left or right edge of the tab display area. To turn to a page whose tab is hidden:Place the cursor over the stack of unnumbered tabs; then press the left mouse button. Choose a page number from the menu that appears.LBL="" HELPID="srch_trblshoot"Troubleshooting Remote SearchesID="ch517"This section lists two problems that you might encounter:You can not find files on remote systems.You will not be able to find files on remote systems if automount, a system setting, is disabled. To check this setting, open a shell window by choosing "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest. In the shell window, type chkconfig. Look for the word "automount" in the left column.If automount is enabled, the word "on" appears in the right column. If it is disabled, the word "off" appears. Contact the Administrator if the setting needs to be changed.You don't find icons that you expect to find.The Search tool searches your network to find host icons, user icons, tape drive icons, and other drive icons. The range of the search depends upon your network setupname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'the number of subnets it contains, how busy it is, and the location of directory servers and object servers. These servers monitor systems on the network and report the devices and users that are available on each. If you do not find icons that you expect to find, it might be because they are outside the area of the network in which the Search tool works.As a general rule, the Search tool finds icons in your subnet and other subnets within eight hops (layers) of your subnet. In some working environments, this may be the entire network. In other environments, it is a portion of the network. For more details, consult your network administrator and the system software release notes. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="57754"Giving Yourself Easy Access to IconsID="ch518"For quick access to your most-used icons, place them in one of three places: on the desktop, on a shelf, or in the Icon Catalog. LBL="" HELPID="fm8"ID="70468"Placing Frequently Used Icons on a ShelfID="ch519"A shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while working in a particular directory. For example, if the directory contains many files, you might want to place the files you use most frequently on the shelf. Or, if the directory contains many color Showcase slides, you might want to place the icon for a color printer onto the shelf.IDREF="16613" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 6-1 shows a sample Directory View window and shelf. Notice that the shelf is blue; the rest of the window is light green. The blue background indicates that it is a holding place for frequently used icons.FILE="dirviewshelf.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="6-1"Figure 6-1 ID="16613"The Shelf on a Directory View Window.To place an icon on the shelf:Display the shelf by choosing "Shelf" from the View menu or by clicking the Shelf button in the toolbar. IDREF="48482" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 6-2 shows the Shelf button. FILE="shelfbutton.bw" POSITION="MARGIN" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="6-2"Figure 6-2 ID="48482"The button in the toolbar that shows and hides the shelfPlace the cursor over the icon that you want to place on the shelf; then press the left mouse button and drag the icon onto the shelf.Release the mouse button when the icon is over the shelf. NotePlacing an icon on the shelf gives you a more convenient place from which to access the icon. It does not move the file.If you no longer need to use an icon frequently, you can take it off the shelf. This is called "putting away" an icon. When you put away an icon, the icon disappears from the shelf but the file is not deleted. See IDREF="60496" TYPE="TITLE""Putting Away an Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="38505"Placing Frequently Used Icons on the DesktopID="ch520"The screen background is called the desktop. It's a place for you to set frequently used icons so you have quick and easy access to them. By default, several icons are placed on each desktop: a folder icon representing your home directory, a dumpster icon, several application icons, and an icon for each peripheral you have installed. To place additional icons on the desktop:Place the cursor over the icon that you want to place on the desktop; then press the left mouse button and drag the icon onto the desktop.Release the mouse button. The icon appears on the desktop. NotePlacing an icon on the desktop gives you a more convenient place from which to access the icon. It does not move the file.If you no longer need to use an icon frequently, you can take it off the desktop. This is called "putting away" an icon. When you put away an icon, the icon disappears from the desktop, but the file is not deleted. See IDREF="60496" TYPE="TITLE""Putting Away an Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""Placing Frequently Used Icons in the Icon CatalogThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. You can add icons to a page in the Icon Catalog, and you can create new pages. See IDREF="51761" TYPE="TITLE""Adding Icons to an Icon Catalog Page" and IDREF="47440" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a New Page in the Icon Catalog."LBL="" HELPID="icbook_addicon"ID="51761"Adding Icons to an Icon Catalog PageID="ch521"Each page in the Icon Catalog shows a collection of icons. To add an icon to an existing page, do the following:Place the cursor over the icon that you want to add to the page; then press the left mouse button and drag the icon into the Icon Catalog window.If you need help finding the icon, open the Search tool by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/searchbook" PARMS=""Icon Catalog
 now, or by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.When the icon is over the blue portion of the window, release the mouse button. The icon appears on the page. NoteNote that placing an icon in the Icon Catalog gives you a more convenient place from which to access the icon. It does not move the file.If you no longer need to use an icon frequently, you can take it off the page. This is called "putting away" an icon. When you put away an icon, the icon disappears from the page but the file is not deleted. See IDREF="60496" TYPE="TITLE""Putting Away an Icon."LBL="" HELPID="icbook_newpage"ID="47440"Creating a New Page in the Icon CatalogID="ch522"By default, the Icon Catalog contains several pages. You can create a new page on which to store your own collection of icons. To do so:Choose "New Page" from the Page menu.A new page appears. The title bar and tab display the label "unnamed." If you create another new page, the page is named "unnamed1."Place icons on the page.Place the cursor over the icon that you want to add to the page; then press the left mouse button and drag the icon into the Icon Catalog window.When the icon is over the blue portion of the window, release the mouse button. The icon appears on the page. Note that placing an icon in the Icon Catalog gives you a more convenient place from which to access the icon. It does not move the file.Choose "Rename" from the Page menu to specify a different name for the page. See IDREF="18141" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming an Icon Catalog Page" for step-by-step instructions.The new page is listed on the Icon Catalog menu on the Find toolchest.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_renamepage"ID="18141"Renaming an Icon Catalog PageID="ch523"IDREF="47440" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a New Page in the Icon Catalog" explains how to add your own page to the Icon Catalog. This section explains how to rename a page.Display the page that you want to rename.Choose the "Page Up" and "Page Down" commands on the Page menu, press the <
Page Up> and <
Page Down> keys on the keyboard, or click a tab. Choose "Rename" from the Page menu.A window appears.Place the cursor in the window, click the left mouse button, and then type a name.Press the 
<Enter> key or click the OK button.The new name appears in the title bar.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_removepage"Removing a Page From the Icon CatalogID="ch524"If you decide that you don't need a page that you have added to the Icon Catalog, you can remove it. To do so, turn to the page you want to remove; then choose "Remove" from the Page menu. A notifier appears asking if you are certain that you want to remove the page. Click OK to remove the page; click Cancel to retain the page.You cannot remove the default pages. If you turn to a default page and choose the "Remove" command, you make any icons that you had added to the page disappear.When you remove a page, you do not delete the icons that appear on the page. To find the icons again, choose "an Icon" from the Find toolchest, or open the Search tool by choosing "Files" from the Find toolchest.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_turnpages"Turning Pages in the Icon CatalogID="ch525"The Icon Catalog stores collections of icons on pages. To turn from one page to another, place the cursor over the tab; then click the left mouse button. You move to that page.Some of the tabs might not fit in the space provided. When this happens, a stack of unnumbered tabs appears at the left or right edge of the tab display area. To turn to a page whose tab is hidden:Place the cursor over the stack of unnumbered tabs; then press the left mouse button. Choose a page number from the menu that appears.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="60496"Putting Away an IconID="ch526"You place icons on the desktop, on a shelf, or in the Icon Catalog so that you can access them easily. If you no longer need to use an icon frequently, you can put it away. When you put away an icon, the icon disappears from the shelf, desktop, or Icon Catalog, but the file is not deleted. Suppose you want to take an icon off of a shelf:Select the icon you want to put away. The icon turns yellow when it's selected.Choose "Put Away" from the Selected menu.The icon disappears from the shelf. To access that icon, you need to open the directory in which it is located.TipYou can also put away an icon by dragging it back into the Directory View window in which it belongs. For example, suppose you've placed the IRIS Showcase icon on the desktop. To put it away, drag the icon into the /usr/sbin Directory View window.LBL="" HELPID="fm9"ID="82483"Viewing and Arranging IconsYou can change the way that icons are arranged and displayed in Directory View windows and on pages in the Icon Catalog and Search tool. This section contains some information that is common to all three windows and some that is specific to Directory View windows.LBL="" HELPID="fm10"Sorting IconsID="ch527"The Arrange menu lets you change the way in which icons are sorted.Choose "by Name" to list the icons alphabetically.Choose "by Date" to list the files according to the date on which they were last modified.Choose "by Size" to list the files according to their size, starting with the largest.Choose "by Type" to list the icons by type (directory, file, or application, for example).LBL="" HELPID="fm11"Resizing IconsID="ch528"Each Directory View window contains a thumbwheel that you can use to change the size of the icons in that window. Place the cursor over the thumbwheel; then drag the mouse up to make the icons smaller and down to make the icons larger. To return to the original icon size, click the small box below the thumbwheel.NoteTo change the size of icons on the desktop, use use the Desktop control panel. To open the Desktop control panel, click the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now, or choose "Desktop" from the Customize menu on the Desktop toolchest.LBL="" HELPID="fm12"ID="98676"Viewing Icons as a ListID="ch529"When you open a folder icon, the contents of the directory appear as icons scattered throughout the window. Choose "as List" from the View menu to arrange the icons in a sorted list. When you view the icons in a list, you seethe icon namethe size of a file icon in bytesthe date and time at which the file was modifiedAdditionally, in Directory View windows, you see an arrow next to folder icons. Click the arrow to display the contents of that folder. To return to the original view, choose "as Icons" from the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="fm12b"Arranging Icons into ColumnsID="ch530"Choose "as Columns" from the View menu to organize icons into columns. To change the view, choose "as Icons" or "as List" from the View menu.FILE="dirview.column.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="6-3"Figure 6-3 ID="14578"Icons organized into columns.LBL="" HELPID="fm13"Previewing Image File Icons in a Directory View WindowID="ch531"If a Directory View window contains image files, click the Preview Image button in the toolbar or choose "as Gallery" from the View menu. Each image file icon is replaced with a small snapshot of the image. FILE="gallery.bw" POSITION="MARGIN" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="6-4"Figure 6-4 ID="48482"The button in the toolbar that lets you preview image files.LBL="" HELPID="fm_viewhidden"Viewing Hidden FilesID="ch532"Many IRIX configuration files are hidden by default. You do not see them in a Directory View window. These files are commonly called dot files because a "." appears as the first character in the filename. Your .login and .cshrc files are examples of hidden files. You can choose to view or hide these files using the "Hidden Files" command on the View menu. A checkmark next to the command indicates that the files are displayed in that Directory View window.LBL="" HELPID="fm_filter"Viewing Icons Based on Name or ContentUse the "Filters" command on the View menu to display only those icons whose name or content matches a certain string of characters. Choose "Filters" from the View menu on a Directory View window.Fill in the fields, as needed:Type a string of characters in the Match Name field. For example, to find files that begin with the letter "d," type: d. To find files that end with the extension ".rgb," type *.rgb.The window immediately changes to display only the icons whose name matches the text you type.Type a string of characters in the Match Content field. The window immediately changes to display only those text files that contain the string you typed.These two fields work together. For example, if you type d in the Match Name field and "schedule" in the Match Content field, you only see icons for files that contain the word "schedule" and whose names begin with the letter "d."Click Show All to display all icons and ignore text in the Match Name and Match Content fields.LBL="7"ID="68336"Using DesksWhen you log in, you see a collection of windows and icons. This collection is called a desk. You can create new desks that contain the windows you need to use to perform a particular task. For example, suppose you spend a portion of your day creating marketing presentations and a portion of your day reading mail. You can create a desk for each. One desk displays the windows that you use while you're creating a presentation. The other desk displays the windows that you use while you're reading and sending mail. This chapter contains:IDREF="50951" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Desk"IDREF="53253" TYPE="TITLE""Switching Between Desks"IDREF="83038" TYPE="TITLE""Moving Windows Between Desks"IDREF="14196" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Windows Between Desks"IDREF="73355" TYPE="TITLE""Listing All the Windows in Your Desks"IDREF="94080" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming a Desk"IDREF="49744" TYPE="TITLE""Placing a Window in All Desks"IDREF="16024" TYPE="TITLE""Deleting a Desk"IDREF="20601" TYPE="TITLE""Manipulating Windows on a Desk"IDREF="82509" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Overview Display"IDREF="90655" TYPE="TITLE""A Legal Notice Regarding the Desks Overview Tool"LBL="" HELPID="ov_createdesk"ID="50951"Creating a DeskID="ch61"Use the "New Desk" command on the Desks Overview window to create a new desk. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.)Choose "
New Desk" from the Desk menu.The snapshot of a new desk appears in the Desks Overview window. The default desk is named "Desk 1"; the first new desk you create is labeled "Desk 2." The number increases with each new desk you create.Any windows or icons that appear on the global desk automatically appear on the new desk.Place the cursor over the desk; then double-click the left mouse button to go to the new desk.Add windows to the desk.NoteThe icons that you place on the desktop appear in all of your desks. You can not vary these icons from desk to desk.For instructions on renaming the desk, see IDREF="94080" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming a Desk."LBL="" HELPID="ov_switchdesk"ID="53253"Switching Between DesksID="ch62"Use the Desks Overview window to go from one desk to another. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.))Place the cursor over the desk you want to display. If the Desks Overview window is too small to display all of the desks, the desk that you want to switch to might be hidden. Click the arrows that appear on the right or bottom edge to scroll through the desks. Double-click the left mouse button. Your screen changes; the new desk appears.NoteYou can use an alternative method. Select the desk you want to display; then choose "Goto Selected" from the Desk menu.LBL="" HELPID="ov_moveitems"ID="83038"Moving Windows Between DesksID="ch63"You can move windows from one desk to another using the Desks Overview. To do so, drag the miniature picture of the window from one desk and drop it into another desk. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.)Make sure that the desks are represented as snapshots, rather than buttons. A snapshot is a picture that shows a miniature version of each window that is on the desk. If the desks are represented as buttons, choose "Show Snapshots" from the Overview menu. If necessary, resize the Desks Overview window so you can see the snapshot of the desks between which you want to move the windows.Place the cursor over the window that you want to move. The name of the window appears when the cursor is over it.NoteIf the name does not appear, choose "Display Window Name" or "Display Icon Name" from the Overview menu. "Display Window Name" displays the name that appears in the title bar of the window; "Display Icon Name" shows the name that appears on the window when it is minimized or stowed.Press the left mouse button and drag the window into the snapshot of the other desk. If you want to position the window in the same location in the other desk, drop the window into the title bar of the desk.Release the mouse button and the window disappears from one desk and appears in the other desk.NoteIf you move a window onto the global desk, that window appears on all of your desks.LBL="" HELPID="ov_copyitem"ID="14196"Copying Windows Between DesksID="ch64"You can copy a window from one desk to another using the Desks Overview window. For example, suppose you are using IRIS Showcase to create a presentation. You can copy the IRIS Showcase window into another desk so that you can access it from there as well. To do so, press the <
Ctrl> key; then drag the item from one desk to another in the Desks Overview window. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.)Make sure that the desks are represented as snapshots, rather than buttons. A snapshot is a picture that shows a miniature version of each window and icon that is on the desk. If the desks are represented as buttons, choose "Show Snapshots" from the Overview menu. If necessary, resize the Desks Overview window so you can see the snapshot of the desks between which you want to move the windows.Place the cursor over the window that you want to copy. The name of the window appears when the cursor is over it.NoteIf the name does not appear, choose "Display Window Name" or "Display Icon Name" from the Overview menu. "Display Window Name" displays the name that appears in the title bar of the window; "Display Icon Name" shows the name that appears on the window when it is iconified or stowed.Press the <
Ctrl> key and left mouse button; then drag the window into another desk.If you want to position the window in the same location in the other desk, drop the window into the title bar of the desk.Release the mouse button and a picture of the window appears in that desk too.NoteIf you copy a window onto the global desk, that item appears on all of your desks.If you close a window that you have copied into another desk, the window closes in both of the desks. To make a window disappear from one desk only, select the window in the Desks Overview display; then choose "Remove from Window" from the Window menu.LBL="" HELPID="ov_listall"ID="73355"Listing All the Windows in Your DesksID="ch65"To get a list of all the windows that exist on your desks, choose "List All..." from the Windows menu on the Desks Overview menu. A new window appears. It contains a list of all the windows that are open or stowed.You can copy a window into your current desk using this list.Place the cursor over the name of a window; then click the left mouse button to select it. A black rectangle surrounds the name when it's selected.Click the Apply or OK button. The window appears in your current desk. If you clicked Apply, the List All window stays on the screen. If you clicked the OK button, the List All window disappears.NoteIf the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.LBL="" HELPID="ov_renamedesk"ID="94080"Renaming a DeskID="ch66"To rename a desk, select a desk in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Rename Selected" command. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.)Place the cursor in the Desks Overview window, over the desk that you want to rename; then click the left mouse button once to select it.A yellow outline appears around the selected desk.Choose "
Rename Selected" from the Desk menu.The name of the desk is highlighted in pink.Type a new, unique name.To replace the existing name, begin typing. The existing name disappears, and the new name appears as you type. To edit a portion of the name, place the cursor within the black rectangle surrounding the name; then click the left mouse button to place a marker. Begin typing to add characters after the marker; press the <
Back Space> key to delete characters preceding the marker.To replace or delete several characters, press the left mouse button and drag the cursor over the characters. Release the mouse button when the characters you want to delete or replace are selected. A black rectangle surrounds these characters. To delete the characters, press the 
<Back Space> key; to replace the characters, begin typing.To apply the name, press the <
Enter> key. To cancel the name change, press the <
Esc> key. If you do not press the <
Enter> key, the desk reverts to its original name when you close and re-open the Desks Overview window.LBL="" HELPID="ov_deletedesk"ID="16024"Deleting a DeskID="ch67"To delete a desk, use the "Delete Selected" command on the Desks Overview window. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.)Place the cursor in the Desks Overview window, over the desk that you want to delete; then click the left mouse button once to select it.A yellow outline appears around the selected desk.Choose "Delete Selected" from the Desk menu.The selected desk disappears.LBL="" HELPID="ov_globaldesk"ID="49744"Placing a Window in All DesksID="ch68"The global desk acts as a template for all other desks. Any windows that you place on the global desk will automatically appear on all of your desks. You can place an item on the global desk in one of three ways:If the window already appears on one of your desks, you can drag it into the global desk in the Desks Overview window. See IDREF="14196" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Windows Between Desks" and IDREF="83038" TYPE="TITLE""Moving Windows Between Desks."You can open the global desk; then open windows. See IDREF="53253" TYPE="TITLE""Switching Between Desks."You can use the "Add to Global" command on the Window menu.Make sure that the desks are represented as snapshots, rather than buttons. A snapshot is a picture that shows a miniature version of each window and icon that is on the desk. If the desks are represented as buttons, choose "Show Snapshots" from the Overview menu.In the Desks Overview window, place the cursor over the window that you want to place on all desks; then click the left mouse button to select it. A yellow outline appears around the selected window.Choose "Add to Global" from the Window menu. The selected window is placed on the global desk and appears on all desks.For instructions on removing a window from the global desk, see IDREF="81470" TYPE="TITLE""Removing a Window From the Global Desk."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="81470"Removing a Window From the Global DeskID="ch69"IDREF="49744" TYPE="TITLE""Placing a Window in All Desks" explains how to place a window on the global desk. If you decide to remove a window from the global desk:Choose "Show Global Desk" to display the global desk.Select the window in the Desks Overview window; then choose "Remove from Desk" on the Window menu.The window disappears from the global desk; it remains on the other desks.To remove the window from all desks except one:Choose "Show Global Desk" to display the global desk.Place the cursor over the window you want to remove from the global desk; then drag it into the snapshot of another desk. The window disappears from the global desk and all other desks except the one you placed it on.To remove the window from all desks:Switch to the global desk.Choose "Show Global Desk." A snapshot of the desk appears in the window.Double-click the snapshot of the global desk. The screen changes and you move to the global desk.Double-click the window to close it. The window disappears from the global desk and all other desks.LBL="" HELPID="ov_manipulatewin"ID="20601"Manipulating Windows on a DeskMost windows on your screen have a Window menu button in the upper left corner. Place the cursor over this button, and then press the left mouse button to display a menu with commands for manipulating the window. The Window menu on the Desks Overview window also provides access to many of these commands. This section provides two examples: IDREF="99449" TYPE="TITLE""Minimizing All Windows in a Desk" and IDREF="75777" TYPE="TITLE""Minimizing a Selected Window."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="99449"Minimizing All Windows in a DeskID="ch610"When you minimize a window, you turn it into a small square so that it uses very little screen space. To minimize all of the windows in a desk, except the Desks Overview window, choose "Minimize All" from the Window menu. To restore all of the windows to their original size, choose "Restore All." NoteIf the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="75777"Minimizing a Selected WindowYou can use the Window menu to minimize selected windows. (If the Desks Overview window is not already showing, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or by choosing "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.)Make sure that the desks are represented as snapshots, rather than buttons. A snapshot is a picture that shows a miniature version of each window and icon that is on the desk. If the desks are represented as buttons, choose "Show Snapshots" from the Overview menu.In the Desks Overview window, place the cursor over the window that you want to minimize; then click the left mouse button to select it. A yellow outline appears around the selected window.Choose "Minimize" from the Window menu. The window becomes a small square.LBL="" HELPID="ov_changeviews"ID="82509"Changing the Overview DisplayLBL="" HELPID="ov2_arrangedesks"Changing the Order of DesksID="ch611"You can change the arrangement of desks within the Desks Overview window.Place the cursor over the title of the desk; then press the left mouse button and drag. An outline of the desk shows where you're moving the desk.Release the mouse button when the desk is positioned over the desk whose place you want it to take.LBL="" HELPID="ov2_displaynames"Displaying the Names of Windows in a DeskID="ch612"By default, a snapshot for each desk appears in the Desks Overview window. The snapshot displays rectangles that indicate the location and relative size and shape of each window on the desk. If you need additional help identifying a window, place the cursor over the rectangle. The window name appears.By default, you see the name that appears on the window when it is minimized or stowed. To see the name that appears in the title bar of the window, choose "Display Window Name" from the Overview menu. If you don't want to see any window names, choose "Display No Names" from the Overview menu.LBL="" HELPID="ov2_resizinghints"Hints for Resizing the WindowID="ch613"You can make the Desks Overview window small and still use it effectively. This section provides hints for doing so.Resize the window so it is smaller. Notice that arrows appear along the right or bottom edge and the menus collapse into one menu called "Menus." You can use the arrows to scroll from one desk to another. Hide the global desk. By default, a snapshot of the global desk appears in the Desks Overview window. If you don't need to use it frequently, choose "Hide Global Desk" from the Overview menu. To show the global desk again, choose "Show Global Desk."Display the desks as buttons instead of snapshots. To do so, choose "Display as Buttons" from the Overview menu. For more complete instructions, see IDREF="57885" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing Desks as Snapshots or Buttons."Make the snapshots or buttons smaller. See IDREF="18463" TYPE="TITLE""Resizing Snapshots or Buttons."Hide the menu bar by choosing "Hide Menubar" from the Overview menu. The menu bar disappears and you can make the window slightly smaller. To access the menus, place the cursor in the window; then press the right mouse button to reveal a pop-up menu. To show the menu bar again, choose "Show Menubar" from the Overview menu.LBL="" HELPID="ov2_displaybutton"ID="57885"Viewing Desks as Snapshots or ButtonsID="ch614"The Desks Overview window shows each of your desks. You can choose to display these as snapshots or as buttons. A snapshot is a small picture that contains a miniature version of each window on the desk; a button is more compact and provides a list view of your desks. See IDREF="13534" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 7-1.FILE="deskoverview.button.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="7-1"Figure 7-1 ID="13534"The Desks Overview window displaying a snapshot of each desk (top) and a button representing each desk (bottom).By default, the desks are displayed as snapshots. To change the setting:Choose "Hide Snapshots" from the Overview window.Choose "Show Snapshots" again to revert to the original view.LBL="" HELPID="ov2_resizebutton"ID="18463"Resizing Snapshots or ButtonsID="ch615"Each desk is represented as a snapshot or button in the Desks Overview window. You can make these smaller or larger by choosing a command from the Scaling rollover menu on the Desk menu.The first five commands are pre-defined. The last command, "Custom," lets you choose a custom setting. The instructions for doing so follow:Choose "Custom" from the Scaling rollover menu. The Custom Desk Scale window appears.Drag the slider in the middle of the window. Drag to the left to get a smaller number; drag to the right to get a larger number.Click the Apply button to add the entry to the menu and leave the window open. Click the OK button to add the entry to the menu and close the window.The "User defined" command shows the custom setting you selected; the buttons or snapshots in the Desks Overview window are resized.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="90655"A Legal Notice Regarding the Desks Overview ToolXerox Corporation has recently asserted certain restrictive software patent rights concerning the Desks and Desks Overview features of the IRIX operating system. Silicon Graphics is evaluating Xerox's claims and intends to defend our ownership position without further disruption to our customers.Accordingly, your 5.3 IRIX operating system will be delivered with the Desks and Desks Overview features in place. However, these features are programmed to automatically turn off on May 15, 1995, unless the system has been provided with a license code that will enable the features to continue functioning. When the Desks Overview feature is initiated, a dialog box will periodically warn you of the May 15, 1995 expiration date.Silicon Graphics intends to resolve this matter with Xerox as soon as possible. Depending on how this dispute is resolved, you and our customers will be presented with one of the following as a permanent means of including or excluding the Desks and Desks Overview features:Silicon Graphics will not provide the license code and these features will not be available. The system will automatically terminate these features on May 15, 1995, without interrupting your use of the system. All items on existing desks will be consolidated onto a single desk.Silicon Graphics will provide the license code at no additional charge and these features will be permanently activated without interrupting your use of the system.Silicon Graphics will provide the license code for a licensing fee based on the licensing fee demanded by Xerox. In this case, you will be free to decide, based on the fee required by Xerox, whether to purchase or reject these features. We believe that Xerox is offering a product having similar features for use on other workstations through third party vendors.We apologize for any inconvenience, and appreciate your support. For updates, see comp.sys.sgi.admin, or call 1-415-390-4334. Please do not send email, or call other SGI numbers.LBL="8"ID="31412"Managing WindowsIf you run an application and open several other windows, your screen quickly becomes cluttered with windows. You need to know how to organize windows into desks, move and shrink windows, change the way windows overlap, and close and quit from windows when you're finished using them.This chapter contains:IDREF="80400" TYPE="TITLE""Organizing Windows Into Desks"IDREF="21380" TYPE="TITLE""Opening Fewer Windows"IDREF="89201" TYPE="TITLE""Resizing Windows"IDREF="58377" TYPE="TITLE""Minimizing Windows"IDREF="78195" TYPE="TITLE""Moving Windows"IDREF="30155" TYPE="TITLE""Raising and Lowering Windows"IDREF="68151" TYPE="TITLE""Closing Windows"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="80400" Organizing Windows Into DesksID="ch71"If your screen becomes cluttered with windows, consider creating a separate desk on which to place certain windows. For example, if you spend a portion of your day using 3D modeling software, and a portion of your day typing and mailing reports, you might want to create a desk for each task. One desk displays the windows that you use to build 3D models. The other desk displays the windows that you use to write reports and send them to coworkers using electronic mail.To create a new desk, use the Desks Overview window. To open it, click the words APP="/usr/sbin/ov" PARMS=""Desks Overview
 now, or choose "Desks Overview" from the Desktop toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="21380"Opening Fewer WindowsOne way to conserve screen space is to open fewer windows. Place commonly used icons on the desktop so you can access them easily. See IDREF="38505" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Frequently Used Icons on the Desktop."Open one Directory View window inside of another using one of these techniques:Choose "as List" from the View menu on a Directory View window. Icons in the window are organized in a list; an arrow appears next to folder icons. Click the arrow and the contents of that directory are listed underneath the folder icon.Locate the icon for the directory you want to open. Drag the icon and place it in the drop pocket in the upper left corner of the window. The window changes to display the contents of that directory.Use the icon finder at the top of the Directory View window. See IDREF="88041" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the Icon Finder" for details. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="89201"Resizing Windows ID="ch72"You can resize windows to help you manage screen space on your desktop. IDREF="90040" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 8-1 shows a window and the areas of the border that you use to make the window narrower, shorter, taller, or wider.FILE="resize.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="8-1"Figure 8-1 
ID="90040"Resizing a window using the border.Place the cursor within the window border.Place it within a horizontal border to change the height of the window; place it within a vertical border to change the width of the border; place it within a corner border to change both the width and the height.Press and hold the left mouse button.The cursor changes into one of the eight resize cursors, depending on the border in which you placed the cursor.Resize the window by dragging the mouse.When you start to move the border, an outline of the window appears showing the new size of the window.Release the left mouse button when the window is the size you want.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="58377"Minimizing WindowsID="ch73"You can turn a window into a small square so that it uses very little screen space. This is called 
stowing or 
minimizing a window. Applications continue to run in windows that have been minimized.To minimize a window:Place the cursor over the Minimize button, as shown in IDREF="73260" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 8-2.You don't need to place the cursor on the small button; place it anywhere within the button's outer border.FILE="minimize.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="8-2"Figure 8-2 
ID="73260"Clicking the minimize button.Click the left mouse button.The window becomes a small square.Restore the window to its original size by clicking the small square.You can also minimize a window using the "Minimize" command on the Window menu.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="78195"Moving WindowsWhen you work with many different windows, frequently you need to move a window to a different place on the screen.Some windows have a border at the top of the window called a title bar. Other windows do not have title bars. These windows are called borderless windows.LBL="" HELPID=""Moving a Window With a Title BarID="ch74"To move a window with a title bar:Place the cursor within the title bar; then press and hold down the left mouse button.Move the window by dragging the mouse.When you start to move the window, the cursor changes into a cross arrow and an outline of the window appears. See IDREF="62032" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Appearance of a Moving Window" to learn how to change this setting.Place the window by releasing the left mouse button.LBL="" HELPID=""Moving a Borderless WindowID="ch75"To move a borderless window:Place the cursor inside the window; then press and hold the 
<Alt> key and the right mouse button.The window menu appears.Choose "Move."An outline of the window appears. See IDREF="62032" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Appearance of a Moving Window" to learn how to change this setting.Drag the mouse to move the window.Click the left mouse button to place the window.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="30155"Raising and Lowering WindowsID="ch76"If windows are lying on top of each other on your screen, and the window you want is hidden, you can raise the window to the top of the stack, or lower the windows that are covering it to the bottom of the stack.To raise a window, place the cursor inside the title bar or within the window border and click the left mouse button. The window pops to the top.If the title bar or window border is not visible, you can lower other windows to the bottom of the stack to expose the window you want.To lower a window:Place the cursor over the Window menu button.The Window Menu button is located in the upper left corner of the title bar.Press the left mouse button and choose "Lower" from the menu.The window jumps to the bottom of the stack and exposes the windows that were beneath it.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="68151" Closing WindowsID="ch77"When you're finished working in a window, you can make it disappear in one of several ways.Place the cursor over the Window menu button; then double-click the left mouse button. The Window menu button appears on the window frame, in the upper left corner of the window.If an application has a Close or Quit button, click that. If an application has a "Close," "Quit," or "Exit" command on one of its menus, choose that.Note
When you close a window, you stop whatever process (application) is running in that window, and the window disappears. When you quit from a window, you stop whatever process (application) is running in that window, and you stop any other processes associated with that window.LBL="9"ID="90048"Sharing and Protecting WorkFiles that you own can be shared with other users on a network. If you do not want other users to access your files, you can change the permissions on those files.You can also copy files to and from tapes and floppy disks or to and from other systems on the network. Creating extra copies of files you own and placing them on a tape or on another system is a good way to back up your system.For details, click an item on the list below.IDREF="29064" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding Permissions"IDREF="21485" TYPE="TITLE""Sharing Directories"IDREF="77689" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files Across the Network"IDREF="60620" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files to and From a Tape"IDREF="31349" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files to and From a Floppy Disk"IDREF="78255" TYPE="TITLE""Making a Backup"LBL="" HELPID="permhelp"ID="29064"Understanding PermissionsEvery time you create a new file, the system automatically identifies you as the file's owner, and assumes that you don't want other users to change the file but you do want others to be able to read its contents. In this way, the system sets ownership and permission settings for the file. For details, click an item on the list below.IDREF="69264" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Permissions"IDREF="81841" TYPE="TITLE""Owner, Group, and Others: A Definition"IDREF="24489" TYPE="TITLE""Permissions Settings: A Definition"IDREF="69060" TYPE="TITLE""Determining Who Owns a File or Directory"IDREF="81917" TYPE="TITLE""Preventing Other Users From Viewing a File You Own"IDREF="83590" TYPE="TITLE""Making a Private Directory"IDREF="94070" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Permission to View and Edit Another User's File"IDREF="33832" TYPE="TITLE""Making Another User the Owner of a File"IDREF="21485" TYPE="TITLE""Sharing Directories"LBL="" HELPID="perm_change"ID="69264"Changing PermissionsEach file on the system is owned by one login name, and has a list of who can and cannot access the file in different ways. You can change permissions on files that you own (that is, those labelled with your login name) using the 
Permissions form.To open the Permissions form, select the file or directory icon whose permissions you want to change; then select "Permissions" from the Selected menu.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="81841"Owner, Group, and Others: A DefinitionID="ch81"When you set permission settings for a file or directory, you divide users into three categories: you (the file's owner), your group, and everyone else. The concept of a group is important in working environments that require an added level of privacy. For example, suppose you are part of a team that is working on a new product. You need to share files with others on the team, but you don't want people outside of the team to view or modify these files. You form a group. See IDREF="80846" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch5.doc" HDG="""Creating a User Group" in the Personal System Administration Guide to learn how to establish and modify groups.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="24489"Permissions Settings: A DefinitionID="ch82"You can grant varying levels of permission settings for files and directories. The three levels for files are read, write, and execute.Read allows people to view a file but does not allow them to edit it.Write allows people to view and make changes to files.Exec allows people to run applications and commands and open directories to view and search their contents. The three levels for directories are read, write, and search.Read allows people to view the files in a directory.Write allows people to copy, delete, or move files into a directory.Search allows people to pass through a directory on their way to another directory.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="69060"Determining Who Owns a File or DirectoryID="ch83"The Permissions form lets you find out who owns a file or directory.Select the file or directory icon. Choose 
"Permissions" from the 
Selectedmenu. If the selected icon is on the desktop, choose "File Permissions" from the Selected toolchest.The name of the file's owner appears next to the "Owner" label. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="81917"Preventing Other Users From Viewing a File You OwnID="ch84"The system assumes the following about files that you own:You want other users to view the contents of these files.You don't want other users to change the files.You can change this setting so that other users are unable to view the file. To do so, you need to use the Permissions form.If the Permissions form is not already open on your screen, select the icon whose permission settings you want to change; then choose 
"Permissions" from the 
Selected menu. If the selected icon is on the desktop, choose "File Permissions" from the Selected toolchest. The Permissions form opens.To prevent others from viewing a file you own:Click the Read button for Group and Others. The checkmark disappears.A button is activated when it has a checkmark; a button is deactivated when the checkmark is removed.Click Apply to enact the change.Click Close to close the form.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="83590"Making a Private DirectoryID="ch85"You can prevent other users from viewing a directory you own by using the Permissions form.If the Permissions form is not already open on your screen, select the folder icon for the directory you want to make private; then choose 
"Permissions" from the 
Selected menu. If the selected folder is on the desktop, choose "File Permissions" from the Selected toolchest. The Permissions form opens.To make a directory private:Click the Read buttons for Group and Others to remove the checkmarks.A button is activated when it has a checkmark; a button is deactivated when the checkmark is removed.Click Apply to enact the change.Click Close to close the form.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="94070"Giving Yourself Permission to View and Edit Another User's FileIf you want to view or edit another user's file, and you do not have permission to do so, you can change the permissions if:The system has a root password and you know either the root password or the password for the user's account.The system does not have a root passwordTo change the permissions on another user's file:Select the file you want to change; then choose "Permissions" from the Selected menu. If the selected file is on the desktop, choose "File Permissions" from the Selected toolchest.Click one of the boxes beneath "Read" or "Write" to the right of the "Others" label; then click the Apply button.If no password is required, the change will occur.If a password is required, a permissions password form appears.The name "root" appears in the Login Name field. You can either type the root password in the Password field or type in the name of another privileged user in the Login Name field and that user's password in the Password field. Click the Ok button to close the password form; then click the Apply button to apply the changes.Click Close to close the Permissions form.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="33832"Making Another User the Owner of a File You OwnIf you own a file, you can easily transfer ownership of the file to another user. To do so, use the 
Permissions form.If the Permissions form is not already open on your screen, select the icon whose permissions you want to change; then choose 
"Permissions" from the 
Selected menu. If the icon is on the desktop, choose "File Permissions" from the Selected toolchest.To make another user the owner of a file:In the field next to Owner, type the login name of the person whom you want to become the file's owner.Click the Apply button to enact the change.Click Close to close the form.LBL="" HELPID="cexport_main"ID="21485"Sharing DirectoriesID="ch86"When you share a directory with other systems, users on those systems can drag the directory from your system's System Manager window onto their own desktops and access it as if the directory resided on their own system. Please click on a topic for more information.IDREF="51251" TYPE="TITLE""Overview of Sharing a Directory"IDREF="77243" TYPE="TITLE""Sharing a Directory So Others Can View and Change Its Contents"IDREF="12090" TYPE="TITLE""Sharing a Directory With Customized Access Permissions"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="51251"Overview of Sharing a DirectoryID="ch87"If you have the optional NFS software installed, you can share directories with other systems on the network. (See IDREF="85953" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch7.doc" HDG="""Checking the Software Configuration" to find out whether NFS is installed.) All shared directories appear in the Shared Resources area of the System Manager window.You use the Share window to specify which systems can view or change the contents of a directory. When a person on a system with which you are sharing a directory drags the directory from your system's System Manager window onto his desktop, the person can open the directory and use it just as if it resided on his own system.Just like any directory that actually does reside on that person's system, if files and subdirectories within the shared directory belong to someone else and are marked as view-only or private, the person may not be able to open or change them. For example, say you share a directory and specify that users on other systems can change its contents. That directory contains three subdirectories: two are private (others can't view or change them), and one is public. A person on another system can view and change the public directory, and can create new directories in the shared directory. But the private directories remain private.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77243"Sharing a Directory So Others Can View and Change Its ContentsID="ch88"If the window that lets you share a directory is not already open, open it by selecting the directory that you want to share and choosing
 "Share" from the Selected toolchest or menu.To share a directory so others can view and change its contents, follow these steps:In the Share window, specify which systems may access the directory.To let all systems on your local network access it, click the box next to All systems.To share with a select set of systems, click the box next to Only these systems, then type in the name of one system and click the Add button; repeat this for each system. An icon for each host appears in the list.You could also choose "Hosts" from the Find toolchest, find the systems, and drag their icons into the share list.If you accidentally add a system to the list, select the system's icon and click the button labeled Delete System from Share List.Have the system share the directory, or customize the access permissions.To let the systems in the list view and change the directory, click OK. The directory appears in the Shared Resources area of your System Manager window, and the other systems can now access it.To customize permissions so some or all of the systems in the list have more or less access to the directory, see IDREF="12090" TYPE="TITLE""Sharing a Directory With Customized Access Permissions."To cancel your request to share the directory, make sure the box next to No systems is checked, and click the OK button.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="12090"Sharing a Directory With Customized Access PermissionsID="ch89"If the window that lets you share a directory is not already open, open it by selecting the directory that you want to share and choosing
 "Share" from the Selected toolchest or menu.To customize access permissions, follow these steps:In the Share window, specify which systems may access the directory.To let all systems on your local network access it, click the box next to All systems.To share with a select set of systems, click the box next to Only these systems, then type in the name of one system and click the Add button; repeat this for each system. An icon for each host appears in the list.You could also choose "Hosts" from the Find toolchest, find the systems, and drag their icons into the share list.If you accidentally add a system to the list, select the system's icon and click the button labeled Delete System from Share List.Click the box next to Customize permissions.In the Accept changes from area, specify which systems can change the directory.To prevent any systems from changing the directory, click the box next to No systems.To allow all systems that are in the share list to change the directory, click the box next to All systems.To allow some systems that are in the share list to change the directory, click the box next to These systems, and drag their icons into the Accept Changes list.If you accidentally add a system to the list, select the system's icon and click the button labeled Delete System from Accept Changes List.In the Give Administrator privileges to area, you can let the Administrator of another system access the directory as if he were the Administrator of your system.NoteThe Administrator has permission to delete every file and directory on the system. Do not give these privileges to more than a few qualified people.To prevent any systems from having Administrator privileges, click the box next to No systems.To allow some systems that are in the share list to have Administrator privileges, click the box next to These systems, and drag their icons into the Administrator list.If you accidentally add a system to the list, select the system's icon and click the button labeled Delete System from Administrator List.If someone whom the system doesn't recognize wants to access the directory, specify a known login account that the person can use, such as the guest account.When all the information is correct, share the directory, or cancel your request to share it.To share the directory with these access permissions, click OK. The directory appears in your System Manager window, and other systems can now access it.To cancel your request to share the directory, click the Cancel button.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77689"Copying Files Across the NetworkIf your system is on a network, you can copy files to and from other systems on the network. To do so, drag icons from one Directory View window to another or use one of several IRIX commands.NoteIf you need to use files on another workstation quite frequently, you may  place its icon on the desktop.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77123"Copying Files From One System to Another Using Directory View WindowsID="ch810"To copy files from one system to another, open a Directory View window of the local directory and a Directory View of the remote directory. Then drag the file you want to copy from one Directory View to the other.Before you copy files, make sure the directory and file permissions are set so they are readable and writable. You can check the file and directory permissions by choosing "Permissions" from the Selected menu in the Directory View window. See IDREF="29064" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding Permissions" for information on how to change the permissions.To copy a file to or from another system on the network:Open a Directory View of the directory on your system to which or from which you want to copy a file.Choose "Remote Directory" from the Desktop toolchest.The Open Remote Directory window appears.Type a user name in the text field below the "As User" label.You need to type in the name of a user who has a login account on the remote system and does not have a password. If you do not have an account on the remote system, or know another account name, try guest.Type the name of the remote system in the text field below the "On Host" label.Type the full pathname of the remote directory you want to open in the text field below the " Remote Directory" label.After you have filled in the above information, click the Ok button.A Directory View of the remote directory appears on your desktop.Drag the file you want to copy from one Directory View to the other. A copy of the file appears in the new location.Close the remote Directory View window by double-clicking the button in the upper left corner of the window border.LBL="" HELPID=""Using the rcp Command to Transfer Files and DirectoriesID="ch811"You can copy information to and from another system using the graphical interface. You can also use the rcp command to transfer files.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="31695"Anatomy of the rcp CommandID="ch812"You can use the rcp (remote copy) command to copy information from your system to another system, or vice versa. To do so, you need this information:The name of the system you are copying to or from and, if the system is in a different domain, the domain name.A login name to access the system.The pathname of the file being copied.A pathname indicating where you want the copied file to be placed on your workstation.The command syntax shows how you specify this information:rcp [user@]source[.domain]:filename local_filename(The square brackets indicate that the information contained within them is optional.)See the rcp reference page (man page) for more detailed information on the command syntax.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="15464"Copying Files From Another System Using the rcp Command This section shows how to use the rcp command to copy files from another system. See IDREF="31695" TYPE="TITLE""Anatomy of the rcp Command" for more details on the command.This example supposes you want to copy file1 from /usr/people/fred on a system named IRIS9 and place it in the /usr/tmp directory on your system. Open a shell window by choosing 
"Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.If you have a login account on IRIS9, type: rcp IRIS9:/usr/people/fred/file1 /usr/tmpIf you don't have a login account on IRIS9, copy the files as guest by typing:rcp guest@IRIS9:/usr/people/fred/file1 /usr/tmpNoteIf IRIS9 is in a different domain (bldg2, for example), you would use IRIS9.bldg2 in the example below instead of IRIS9.Press 
<Enter>.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="48848"Copying Files to Another System Using the rcp Command This section shows how you use the rcp command to copy files to another system. See IDREF="31695" TYPE="TITLE""Anatomy of the rcp Command" for more details on the command. This example supposes you want to copy file2 from /usr/people/joe on your system to /usr/tmp on a system called IRIS9. Open a shell window by choosing 
"Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.Type:rcp /usr/people/joe/file2 guest@IRIS9:/usr/tmpLBL="" HELPID=""Copying a Directory Using the rcp CommandID="ch813"To copy a directory and its contents from one system to another, you use the -r option to rcp. This example shows what you would type to copy the directory /usr/people/joe/reports from your system to /usr/tmp on a system called IRIS9.Open a shell window by choosing 
"Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.Type: rcp -r /usr/people/joe/reports guest@IRIS9:/usr/tmpNoteThe -v option lets you see the names of files as they are copied. Consider the example. If you add the -v option, you see the names of the files in the reports directory as they are copied to IRIS9.LBL="" HELPID=""Using ftp to Copy Files to Another SystemID="ch814"The ftp program lets you transfer files using the Internet File Transfer Protocol. To use ftp, you must have a login account with a password on the remote workstation. If the account doesn't have a password, ftp will not work.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="55965"Using ftp to Log Into Another System To use the ftp command to transfer files between workstations, you must first log in to the remote machine using ftp. This example shows how to use ftp to connect to the system IRIS9.NoteIf IRIS9 is in a different domain (bldg2, for example), you would use IRIS9.bldg2 in the example below instead of IRIS9.Open a shell window by choosing 
"Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.Start the program by typing:ftp IRIS9Press 
<Enter>.The screen displays something similar to this:Connected to IRIS9.220 IRIS9 FTP server ready.Type the login name at the prompt that appears; then press 
<Enter>. A user named joe would type:Name (IRIS9:joe): joeType the password at the password prompt; then press 
<Enter>.331 Password required for joe.Password:NoteIf the account does not have a password, you cannot use ftp.You are logged in when the screen displays:230 User joe logged in.LBL="" HELPID=""Copying a File to Another System Using the ftp CommandOnce you are logged in to the remote workstation, you can transfer files from your system to IRIS9, and vice versa, using the put and get commands. (If you have not logged in to the other workstation yet, see IDREF="55965" TYPE="TITLE""Using ftp to Log Into Another System.") This example shows how to transfer a file called file1 from your machine to IRIS9. Type the following at the ftp prompt:ftp> put /usr/people/joe/file1 /usr/tmpThis copies file1 from /usr/people/joe on your system to /usr/tmp on IRIS9.To copy file2 from IRIS9 to your system, type:ftp> get /usr/people/fred/file2 /usr/tmpThis copies file2 from /usr/people/fred on IRIS9 to the /usr/tmp directory on your system.The ftp program has many options. See the ftp reference page (man page) for further details.LBL="" HELPID="tape_tool"ID="60620"Copying Files to and From a TapeIf you have a tape drive attached to your system, you can easily copy files to and from a tape using the tape tool.If you do not have a tape drive attached to your system, you can copy files to and from a tape on a remote system by placing the tape drive icon onto your desktop. See IDREF="88420" TYPE="TITLE""Finding a Tape Drive" for information on how to find a remote tape drive.Also see IDREF="50460" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch7.doc" HDG="""About Tape Formats and Capacities" in the Personal System Administration Guide; it explains the different types of tapes that are available.For details on copying files to and from a tape, see:IDREF="97116" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files to a Tape"IDREF="36391" TYPE="TITLE""Listing Files on a Tape"IDREF="20554" TYPE="TITLE""Retrieving Files From a Tape"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="97116"Copying Files to a TapeID="ch815"Use the tape tool to copy files to a tape. If you do not already have the tape tool open on your screen, open it by placing a blank tape in the tape drive, selecting the tape drive icon on your desktop, and selecting "Save/Restore Files" from the Selected toolchest.If you use a tape that is not blank, place the tape in the tape drive, then double-click the tape drive icon to open the tape tool.To copy files to a tape:Click on the button in the lower left corner of the window and choose "
tar" or 
"cpio."Click on the button to the right of the tar/cpio button and choose "Write."Select the file and directory icons you want to copy to the tape; then drag the icons into the tape tool window. If you want to delete any files or directories from this list, click on the item you want to delete. Then click the Removefrom List button. The item disappears from the list.Click the Apply button.A notifier appears prompting you to load the tape in the tape drive if it is not already loaded.Click the Accept button in the notifier window.A window appears listing the files as they are copied. When the files are successfully copied onto the tape, you see a message. NoteWhen you copy files onto a tape, you write over any other data already on that tape.Click the Cancel button to close the tape tool form.Eject the tape by selecting the tape drive icon and choosing "Eject <Tape>" from the Selected toolchest. (<Tape> is the type of tape you are using.) Place a label on the tape and label it cpio or tar tape, depending on the method you used to transfer the files.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="20554"Retrieving Files From a TapeID="ch816"Use the tape tool to retrieve files from a tape. If you do not already have the tape tool open on your screen, open it by placing a tape in the tape drive and double-clicking the tape drive icon on your desktop.To retrieve files from a tape:Click on the button in the lower left corner of the tape tool window.Choose "
tar" if the files were copied to the tape using tar.Choose "cpio" if the files were copied to the tape using cpio.Click on the button to the right of the tar/cpio button and choose "Read."Type a destination directory in the directory field.Click the Apply button.A notifier appears prompting you to load the tape in the tape drive if it is not already loaded.Click the Accept button in the notifier window.The files are copied onto your system. Click the Cancel button to close the tape tool.Eject the tape by selecting the tape drive icon and choosing "Eject <Tape>" from the Selected toolchest. (<Tape> is the type of tape you are using.) LBL="" HELPID=""ID="36391"Listing Files on a TapeID="ch817"Use the tape tool to list (view) the contents of a tape without copying the contents onto your system. If you do not already have the tape tool open on your screen, open it by placing a tape in the tape drive and double-clicking the tape drive icon on your screen.Click on the button in the lower left corner of the tape tool window.Choose "
tar" if the files were copied to the tape using tar.Choose "cpio" if the files were copied to the tape using cpio.Click on the button to the right of the tar/cpio button and choose "List."Click the Apply button.A notifier appears prompting you to load the tape in the tape drive if it is not already loaded.Click the Accept button in the notifier window.A list of the contents of the tape appears in the Tape tool window.Click the Cancel button to close the tape tool.Eject the tape by selecting the tape drive icon and choosing "Eject <Tape>" from the Selected toolchest. (<Tape> is the type of tape you are using.)LBL="" HELPID=""ID="31349"Copying Files to and From a Floppy DiskIf you have a floppy disk drive attached to your system, you can copy files to and from a floppy disk. You can also copy Macintosh and DOS PC files onto your system.If you are copying files from a Macintosh or DOS PC, make sure the application software is compatible with application software available on your system. Depending on the application, some files may need to be run through a translator before you can use them.NoteAlways use the desktop when copying Macintosh files, (not the standard IRIX cp or rcp utilities). The desktop copies all the necessary components of the file, including the data fork , the resource fork, and the Finder information. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="86172"Copying Files Onto a Floppy DiskID="ch818"To copy files onto a floppy disk: Insert a floppy disk into your drive.The floppy icon on your desktop changes to show that a floppy is present in the drive.Open a Directory View window of the directory that contains the files you want to copy.Double-click the floppy drive icon to open a Directory View of the contents of the floppy disk; then drag the files you want to copy into this window.Close the Directory View of the floppy disk by double-clicking the button in the upper left corner of the window border.Eject the floppy disk by selecting the floppy drive icon and choosing "Eject Floppy" from the Selected toolchest.NoteAlways use the desktop when copying Macintosh files, not the standard IRIX cp or rcp utilities. The desktop copies all the necessary components of the file, including the data fork , the resource fork, and the Finder information. LBL="" HELPID=""Copying Files From a Floppy DiskID="ch819"You can copy files from a floppy disk by opening up a directory view of the files on the floppy and dragging them into a directory view on your system.If you are copying files from a Macintosh or DOS PC, make sure the application software is compatible with application software available on your system. Depending on the application, some files may need to be run through a translator before you can use them.To copy files from a floppy disk onto your system:Insert the floppy disk into the drive.A floppy disk icon appears on your screen.Double-click the icon to open a Directory View of the files on the floppy disk.Open a Directory View window of a directory on your machine to which you want to copy the files. Drag the files from the floppy disk Directory View into the Directory View you opened on your system.The files are copied to the new location.Close the Directory View of the floppy disk by double-clicking the button in the upper left corner of the window border.Eject the floppy disk by selecting the floppy drive icon and choosing "Eject Floppy" from the Selected toolchest.NoteAlways use the desktop when copying Macintosh files (not the standard IRIX cp or rcp utilities). The desktop copies all the necessary components of the file, including the data fork , the resource fork, and the Finder information. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="78255"Making a BackupID="ch820"Making a backup of your work means creating an extra copy of your files and storing them elsewhere, such as on another workstation or on a tape. The first two methods listed below describe how to make a backup copy of select files; the third method describes howto back up the entire system. To make a backup copy of several files, copy them onto a tape using the tape tool. See IDREF="97116" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files to a Tape."To copy a few files onto another workstation, see IDREF="77123" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files From One System to Another Using Directory View Windows."To make a complete backup using the Back Up and Restore tool in the System Manager, see IDREF="34227" BOOK="PerSysAdmin" FILE="ch7.doc" HDG="""Backing Up and Restoring Files" in the Personal System Administration Guide. This method creates a backup of your entire system; if the workstation ever crashes, you can restore your working environment using these backup tapes.ID="ch821"LBL="10"ID="73443"Customizing the DesktopYou can customize your desktop in a number of ways. You can change the background pattern and colors, choose an interesting screen saver, change mouse and keyboard settings, and customize a number of other window and desktop characteristics.For details, see:IDREF="57944" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Desktop Background"IDREF="89077" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Window Color Schemes"IDREF="29481" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing the Screen Saver"IDREF="41898" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Mouse Settings"IDREF="81996" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Keyboard Key Settings"IDREF="40325" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Window Settings"IDREF="87032" TYPE="TITLE""Customizing Desktop Settings"IDREF="75903" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Language and Keyboard Layout"IDREF="31644" TYPE="TITLE""Adding Directories to Your Path"IDREF="21902" TYPE="TITLE""Running Applications When You Log In Using the .sgisession File"IDREF="35079" TYPE="TITLE""Modifying the Toolchests"IDREF="87698" TYPE="TITLE""Using Your Own Customized Backgrounds"IDREF="88851" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Off the User Environment"LBL="" HELPID="background"ID="57944"Changing the Desktop BackgroundID="ch91"Each desk has its own background color. You can change any desktop background color or pattern using the Background Setting control panel. You can also create custom colors. For details, see:IDREF="95097" TYPE="TITLE""Choosing a Solid Color for Your Desktop Background"IDREF="98590" TYPE="TITLE""Choosing a Multicolored Pattern for Your Desktop Background"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="95097"Choosing a Solid Color for Your Desktop BackgroundID="ch92"If you want your desktop background to be one solid color rather than a pattern of two colors, you can choose a color using the color palette in the desktop Background Setting control panel.If you haven't already opened the Background Setting control panel, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/background" PARMS=""Background
 now or by choosing "Background" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To choose a solid color for your desktop background:Click on the word "Solid" in the Patterns list.A small colored box appears below the sample view of the background.Click on the small, colored box above the Apply button.The Color Browser window appears on top of the main control panel window. You may want to move the Color Browser window aside so you can see both windows.Click on one of the colors below the heading "Palette Colors," or create your own custom color. To do this:Move your mouse cursor on top of the small circle in the colored hexagon.Press down on the left mouse button, and move your mouse.Release the mouse button when the circle is above a color you like.The color beneath the circle appears in the rectangle next to the "Current Color" label.Move the slider bar next to "Value" back and forth to brighten or darken the color.Click the down arrow between the "Current Color" and "Stored Color" rectangles to store a color you like while you browse through other colors.When you've found a color you like, click the OK  button in the Color Browser window.Click the Apply button in the  main Background Setting control panel.Your background changes to the new color.Click the Close  button in the main Background Setting control panel window to close the panel.NoteIf the background on your screen flashes when you run GL applications, you may have hardware that supports only a single colormap. To prevent the screen from flashing, choose one of the colors below the Palette Colors label in the Color Browser window when choosing a background color.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="98590"Choosing a Multicolored Pattern for Your Desktop BackgroundYou can choose a multicolored pattern for your desktop background by using the Background Setting control panel. First choose the pattern you want, then choose the colors.If you haven't already opened the Background Setting control panel, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/background" PARMS=""Background
 now or by choosing "Background" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To choose a pattern and colors for your desktop background:Scroll through the list of patterns in the patterns list, then click on a pattern you want. The display to the right of the list of patterns switches to the new pattern, and a number of small colored squares appear below it. These squares represent the colors you can use in your pattern.Click on one of the small squares.The Color Browser window appears on top of the main control panel window. You may want to move the Color Browser window aside so you can see both windows.Click on one of the colors below the heading "Palette Colors," or create your own color. To do this:Move your mouse cursor on top of the small circle in the colored hexagon.Press down on the left mouse button, and move your mouse.As you move your mouse around the hexagon, the color beneath the small circle appears in the rectangle next to the "Current Color" label. This rectangle acts as your color palette while you choose a new color.Release the mouse button when the small circle is on top of a color you like.Move the slider bar next to "Value" back and forth to brighten or darken the color.Click the Apply button in the Color Browser window to see the new color mix with your pattern in the sample background square.If you don't like the color, you can continue to choose new colors and click Apply until you decide on a color you like. Click the down arrow between the "Current Color" and "Stored Color" rectangles to store a color you like while you browse through other colors.Click on another small colored square in the main window and create the next color.Click the  Apply button in the Color Browser window to see the new color mix with the pattern and the first color you chose in the sample background square.Continue to click on the small colored boxes and create new colors until you've created a color combination that you like.Click the OK  button in the Color Browser window.The window closes.Click the Apply button in the main Background Setting control panel.Your desktop background changes to the new multicolored pattern.Click the Close button in the main Background Setting control panel to close the panel.You can also create colors by choosing "Value and RGB" or "HSV and RGB" from the Sliders menu. These menu options reveal sliders that allow you to change the colors by moving the sliders instead of moving the circle within the hexagon.NoteIf the background on your screen flashes when you run GL applications, you may have hardware that supports only a single colormap. To prevent the screen from flashing, choose colors below the Palette Colors label in the Color Browser window when choosing  background colors.LBL="" HELPID="schemes"ID="89077"Changing Window Color SchemesYou can use the Color Scheme Browser to change the color scheme of windows on your screen. You can also edit the colors in a chosen scheme and save the changes.For more information, see:IDREF="11785" TYPE="TITLE""The Color Scheme Browser: An Overview"IDREF="75562" TYPE="TEXT"IDREF="75562" TYPE="TITLE""Choosing a Color Scheme"IDREF="74439" TYPE="TITLE""Editing a Color Scheme"IDREF="59503" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding the Color Scheme Sample Images"LBL="" HELPID="schemes_overview"ID="11785"The Color Scheme Browser: An OverviewEach item in a window has a color assigned to it. These items, when combined, create a scheme of colors that make the window easy to read, understand, and look at. The Color Scheme Browser contains a number of preset color schemes that you can apply. It also allows you to edit colors in a scheme and create your own combination of colors.To open the Color Scheme Browser, click the words  APP="/usr/sbin/schemebr" PARMS=""Color Scheme Browser
 now, or choose "Color Schemes" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.LBL="" HELPID="schemes_choose"ID="75562"Choosing a Color SchemeYou can choose a different color scheme for windows on your screen by using the Color Scheme Browser. If you haven't already opened the browser, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/schemebr" PARMS=""Color Scheme Browser
, or by choosing "Color Schemes" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To choose a color scheme:Browse through the schemes by clicking on different names in the color schemes list. The display to the right of the schemes list shows you a sample image of the chosen color scheme.Click the Apply button when you find a scheme you like.A message appears telling you that the new scheme will not affect existing open applications.  To use the new schemes, restart those applications.Choose "Quit" from the Application menu to close the Color Scheme Browser window.LBL="" HELPID="schemes_edit"ID="74439"Editing a Color SchemeIf you want to use a particular color scheme  in the Color Scheme Browser, but don't like one of the colors in the scheme, you can use Edit Mode to change the color. If you haven't already opened the Color Scheme Browser, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/schemebr" PARMS=""Color Scheme Browser
, or by choosing "Color Schemes" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To edit a color scheme:Click on the name of the scheme you want to edit.The display to the right of the schemes list changes to show the sample scheme.Choose "Edit Mode" from the Application menu.A thumbwheel and color palette appear at the bottom of the sample scheme.Use Quick Help to familiarize yourself with the assignment of each color in the color scheme.Choose "Quick Help" from the Help menu in the Color Scheme Browser window.Move your mouse cursor over a colored square in the Color Palette. The assignment of that color appears next to the mouse cursor and in a status message at the bottom of the Color Scheme Browser window.Move your mouse cursor on top of a section of the scheme display to get a description of that section.Click the left mouse button to deactivate Quick Help.Edit the color you want to change.Click on the square of color in the Color Palette that you want to change.The Scheme Editor Color Browser appears.Move your mouse cursor on top of the small circle in the colored hexagon in the Scheme Editor window.Press down on the left mouse button, and move your mouse.As you move your mouse around the hexagon, the color beneath the small circle appears in the rectangle next to the "Current Color" label. This rectangle acts as your color palette while you choose a new color.Release the mouse button when the small circle is on top of a color you like.Move the slider bar next to "Value" back and forth to brighten or darken the color.The color in the sample scheme changes as you alter the color in the editor.When you find a color you like, click the Ok button to close the Scheme Editor window.Move the thumbwheel back and forth to darken or lighten all colors in the scheme.Save the changes.Click the Apply button in the main Color Scheme Browser window if you want to save the changes to the same scheme name.A message appears telling you that the new scheme was saved in your local scheme directory, and the scheme name changes to an italic font to show that the scheme was altered.If you want to rename the scheme, choose "Save As..." from the Application menu instead of clicking the Apply button. Then create a name for the altered scheme. The new scheme appears in the schemes list.Changes affect your user account only and do not affect color schemes used by other users on your system.Choose "Quit" from the Application menu to close the Color Scheme Browser window.You can also change additional colors used in a particular scheme by choosing "Additional Colors" from the Sample Image menu.  A sample display appears showing any additional colors and assignments for those colors.LBL="" HELPID="schemes_delete"Deleting a Color SchemeIf you altered a color scheme and saved it to the current scheme name, the scheme name shows up in italic font to show that it was altered. You can delete the changes you made and return to the original scheme by using "Remove Selected Scheme" in the Color Scheme Browser.If you haven't already opened the Color Scheme Browser, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/schemebr" PARMS=""Color Scheme Browser
, or by choosing "Color Schemes" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest. To delete a color scheme:Select the scheme that contains the changes you want to delete.Choose "Remove Selected Scheme" from the Applications menu.A notifier appears telling you that the local scheme (the scheme that contains the changes you made) will be removed from your system. Click the OK button to continue.The scheme reverts to the default colors for that scheme, and the scheme name appears in regular text.Choose "Quit" from the Application menu to close the Color Scheme Browser window.To delete all changed schemes at once and return all schemes to their default scheme, choose "Remove Local Schemes" from the Application menu.LBL="" HELPID="schemes_images"ID="59503"Understanding the Color Scheme Sample ImagesEvery item in a window is assigned a color. The Color Scheme Browser contains several sample images that display a scheme's assigned colors for each of these items. These sample images include:"Basic Colors" displays a scheme's colors for the most frequently used items in a window, including buttons, scroll bars, and text input areas."Additional Colors" displays a scheme's colors for any additional items in a window, including scrolled list items, accent colors, and errors."Window Manager Colors" displays a scheme's colors for window borders."Graphics Colors" displays fixed colors that applications assign to specific items when they want a color to have a consistent and recognizable meaning. These colors do not change color as schemes change. They merely darken or lighten in color, depending on the scheme.LBL="" HELPID="schemes_browser"ID="47485"Using the Color BrowserUse the Color Browser when changing colors in the Background Setting or Color Scheme Browser control panels.To select a color using the Color Browser:Move your mouse cursor on top of the small circle in the colored hexagon.Press down on the left mouse button, and move your mouse.As you move your mouse around the hexagon, the color beneath the small circle appears in the rectangle next to the "Current Color" label. This rectangle acts as your color palette while you choose a new color.Release the mouse button when the small circle is on top of a color you like.Move the slider bar next to "Value" back and forth to brighten or darken the color.Click the down arrow between the "Current Color" and "Stored Color" rectangles to store a color you like if you want to browse through other colors.Click the Apply button if you want to see the current color applied to the sample image in the main control panel.Click the OK button when you decide on a color.The Color Browser window closes.If you are choosing a color for your screen background using the Color Browser in the Background Setting panel, and want a color that blends in well with your current window color scheme, try one of the Palette Colors at the top of the Color Browser. Click on a colored square to choose a color.You can also create colors by choosing "Value and RGB" or "HSV and RGB" from the Sliders menu. These menu options reveal sliders that allow you to change the colors by moving the sliders instead of moving the circle within the hexagon.LBL="" HELPID="screensaver"ID="29481"Customizing the Screen SaverYour system has a screen saver mechanism that blacks out the monitor screen when your system is idle for 10 minutes. You can select a more attractive screen saver by using the Screen Saver control panel. You can also change the period of time you want the idle screen to stay visible before the screen saver is activated, and you can lock your screen. For details, see:IDREF="77097" TYPE="TITLE""Choosing a Screen Saver"IDREF="22713" TYPE="TITLE""Locking Your Screen"IDREF="39804" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Screen Saver Activation Delay"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77097"Choosing a Screen SaverID="ch93"Choose a screen saver using the Screen Saver control panel. If you haven't already opened the panel, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ssaver" PARMS=""Screen Saver
 now or by choosing 
"Screen Saver" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To choose a screen saver:If the text near the top of the window says, "Screen Saver Off," click the box to the left of the text to turn on the screen saver.A checkmark appears in the box, and the text, "Screen Saver On," appears.Click on one of the screen saver choices.Click  Demo and keep your mouse still.The screen blacks out, and the screen saver you chose is activated.Move your mouse to end the demo.If you like this screen saver, click the Close button to close the screen saver window. Next time your screen blacks out, the screen saver you chose will display on your screen.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="22713"Locking Your ScreenID="ch94"You can lock your screen by using the Screen Saver control panel.   If you haven't already opened the control panel, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ssaver" PARMS=""Screen Saver
 now or by choosing 
"Screen Saver" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To lock your  screen, click the box next to "Lock Screen" in the control panel.  A checkmark appears. Next time your screen saver is activated, and you try to deactivate the screen saver by moving the mouse, a login screen appears. This login screen requires you to type in your password (if your account requires one) to return to your work.This login window also allows you to return to the screen saver. Click the box to the left of the login name, and the screen saver is activated again. Instead of moving your mouse to deactivate the screen saver, you must click the left mouse button to return to the login screen.If you do not want the login screen to come up when you deactivate the screen saver, click the box to the left of "Lock Screen" to remove the checkmark.NoteYou cannot choose the "Lock Screen" mechanism when using a GL screensaver. When you choose a GL screensaver, a message appears in the control panel telling you that screen locking is unavailable for that screen saver.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="39804"Changing the Screen Saver Activation DelayID="ch95"By default, if your screen is idle for 10 minutes, it will black out. You can change the period of time you want the idle screen to stay visible before the screen saver is activated using the Screen Saver control panel.If you haven't already opened the control panel, open it by clicking the words APP="/usr/sbin/ssaver" PARMS=""Screen Saver
 now or by choosing 
"Screen Saver" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To change the activation delay:Slide the bar next to "Delay (minutes)" forward or backward to select the number of minutes you want.Click the Close button to close the control panel.LBL="" HELPID="mouse"ID="41898"Customizing Mouse SettingsID="ch96"You can customize the acceleration and button-click speed of your mouse. If you are left-handed, you can switch the button behavior of the mouse so you can use the mouse with your left hand. For details, see:IDREF="73850" TYPE="TITLE""Adjusting the Mouse Cursor Acceleration"IDREF="94752" TYPE="TITLE""Switching the Mouse for Left-Handed Use"IDREF="45364" TYPE="TITLE""Adjusting the Mouse Click Speed"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="73850"Adjusting the Mouse Cursor AccelerationMouse cursor acceleration refers to how quickly the cursor moves on your screen when you move the mouse. By default, the mouse cursor acceleration is set to slow. You can increase the acceleration using the Mouse Settings control panel.You can also change the threshold. The threshold is the amount of units your mouse needs to move before the pointer starts to move. If you set a high threshold, the pointer will move more quickly as you move the mouse. If you set a low threshold, the mouse will need to move further before the pointer will move.If you haven't already opened the Mouse Settings control panel, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/mouse" PARMS=""Mouse
 now, or by choosing "Mouse" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To adjust the acceleration of the mouse cursor and to adjust the threshold:Click on one of the diamond-shaped buttons under  "Mouse Acceleration."The buttons to the left slow down the acceleration; the buttons to the right speed up the acceleration. You can also adjust the acceleration by clicking the button below "Finer Control"  and sliding the bar next to "Acceleration"  back and forth.To change the threshold level, click the button below "Finer Control," and move the sliding bar next to  "Threshold"  back and forth.Move the mouse around and watch the pointer move on your screen.Continue to click on diamonds or move the sliders until you've reached the desired acceleration and threshold levels.Click the Close button to close the control panel.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="94752"Switching the Mouse for Left-Handed UseID="ch97"You can switch the button behavior of the mouse so you can use the mouse with your left hand by using the Mouse Settings control panel. If you haven't already opened the panel, open it by clicking theword APP="/usr/sbin/mouse" PARMS=""Mouse
 now, or by choosing "Mouse" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To switch the button behavior of the mouse for left-handed use, click the diamond-shaped button next to the "Left handed" label.The button behavior switches so that tasks normally performed with the left mouse button can now be performed with the right mouse button.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="45364"Adjusting the Mouse Click SpeedID="ch98"By default, the mouse click speed is set to a midrange level. This means that you can double-click a mouse button at a reasonable speed, and the action will be performed. If you would like the mouse to respond to a slower or a faster click speed, you can adjust the speed using the Mouse Settings control panel.If you haven't already opened the panel, open it by clicking theword APP="/usr/sbin/mouse" PARMS=""Mouse
 now, or by choosing "Mouse" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To adjust the click speed of the mouse:Click one of the diamond-shaped buttons below  "Click Speed"  in the lower half of the control panel.Click the button below "Slow" to slow down the click speed.Click the button below "Fast" to speed up the click speed.Click the button between the slow and fast buttons if you want a midrange click-speed (this is the default).Click the  button below "Finer Control" to display a sliding bar. Adjust the speed by sliding the bar back and forth.Test the click speed by double-clicking on the button labeled, "Click Here!"If you chose a fast click-speed, you will need to double-click the mouse button very quickly to test it. If you chose a slow click-speed, you should be able to double-click at a fairly slow rate.Click the Close button to close the control panel.Any application you start up after you make the change uses the new click speed. Restart other applications if you want them to use the new click speed, or log out, then log back in to use the new click speed on the desktop.LBL="" HELPID="keyboard"ID="81996"Customizing Keyboard Key SettingsYou can adjust your keyboard key click and key repeat settings using the Keyboard Settings control panel. For details, see:IDREF="88045" TYPE="TITLE""Turning On Key Click"IDREF="70938" TYPE="TITLE""Adjusting Key-Repeat Speed and Delay"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="88045"Turning On Key ClickID="ch99"Key click is a clicking sound you can choose to hear when you type on your keyboard. Your system ships with the key click turned off. You can turn key click on or off using the Keyboard Settings control panel. If you haven't already opened the panel, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/keyboard" PARMS=""Keyboard
 now, or by choosing "Keyboard" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn on the key click:Click the button next to  "Key Click."  A checkmark appears in the box.When you type on the keyboard, you will hear the key-click sound.Click the Close button to close the control panel.To turn key click off, click the box to the left of the "Key Click" label. The checkmark disappears.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="70938"Adjusting Key-Repeat Speed and DelayID="ch910"The key-repeat speed is the rate at which a keyboard character is repeatedly printed to your screen when you hold down a key. Key repeat delay is the amount of time the system waits before beginning the repeat sequence.You can adjust the key repeat speed and delay using the Keyboard Settings control panel. If you haven't already opened the panel, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/keyboard" PARMS=""Keyboard
 now, or by choosing "Keyboard" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.NoteKey repeat sequences are often used when you want to use the 
<Backspace> key to delete a series of characters, or when you want to add multiple spaces using the 
Space Bar. Changing the key repeat speed also affects these keys.To adjust the key-repeat speed and delay:Click one of the diamond-shaped buttons to adjust the key repeat speed and delay:Click the button below "Slow" to slow down the repeat speed.Click the button below "Fast" to increase the repeat speed.Click the button between the slow and fast buttons if you want a midrange repeat-speed (this is the default).Click the button below Finer Control  to display two sliding bars. Adjust the repeat speed and delay by sliding the bars back and forth. Move the slider next to "Repeat Delay" to the left to lengthen the repeat delay. Move it to the right to shorten the repeat delay.Test the speed and delay by clicking in the text input box next to  "Test" and pressing down on a key on the keyboard.Click the Close button to close the control panel.LBL="" HELPID="customdesktop"ID="40325"Customizing Window SettingsThe Window Settings control panel lets you customize window attributes. For details, see:IDREF="11266" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Orientation of the Toolchests"IDREF="83540" TYPE="TITLE""Displaying the Windows Overview"IDREF="62032" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Appearance of a Moving Window"IDREF="45302" TYPE="TITLE""Turning On Automatic Window Placement"IDREF="84894" TYPE="TITLE""Saving Your Desktop Layout"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="11266"Changing the Orientation of the ToolchestsID="ch911"The toolchests display vertically in the upper left corner of your screen. You can set them to display horizontally by using the Window Settings control panel.If the Window Settings control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/windows" PARMS=""Windows
 now, or by choosing "Windows" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To change the orientation of the toolchests:Click the button next to "Horizontal."A small marker appears on the button to let you know it's activated, and the toolchest changes orientation.A window appears, telling you that the window manager must be restarted in order to rearrange the minimized window placement around the toolchests.Click the  OK  button to close the window.Click the Close button to close the control panel.A window  appears, asking you if you want to restart the window manager.If you click  OK, all the windows you currently have open will redraw and the minimized windows will adjust themselves below the toolchests.If you click  No, the minimized windows will not change position until you log out and log back in to your system.Click the button next to "Vertical" to switch the toolchests back to their original position.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="83540"Displaying the Windows OverviewID="ch912"By default, all minimized windows appear individually on your desktop. If you have Windows Overview turned on, all minimized windows are grouped together and appear in a window on your desktop. You will also see a borderless, minimized window for every window open on your desk.When you use multiple desks, the Windows Overview  will appear on all desks. All minimized windows on all desks will appear in the Windows Overview. You will also see a borderless  minimized window for every window open on every desk.You can turn Windows Overview  on or off using the Window Settings control panel. If the panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/windows" PARMS=""Windows
 now, or by choosing "Windows" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn on Windows Overview:Click the button next to "Display Windows Overview."A checkmark appears to let you know it's activated, and a window  appears, telling you that the window manager will need to be restarted in order for the change to take affect.Click the  OK  button to close the window.Click the Close  button to close the control panel.A window  appears, asking you if you want to restart the window manager.If you click OK, all the windows you currently have open will redraw, and the Windows Overview appears on your desktop. All the minimized windows for all desks appear in the Windows Overview.If you click No, the Windows Overview  will not appear until you log out and log back in to your system.To turn off Windows Overview, click the button next to "Display Windows Overview" in the Window Settings control panel.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="62032"Changing the Appearance of a Moving WindowID="ch913"While you move a window, the window appears as a red outline. If you want, you can change the look of the moving window from a red outline to an opaque image of the window using the Window Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/windows" PARMS=""Windows
 now, or by choosing "Windows" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To change the appearance of a moving window:Click the button next to "Opaque Window Move."A checkmark appears to let you know it's activated.Click the  Close  button to close the control panel.To turn off the opaque window setting, click the button next to "Opaque Window Move." The checkmark disappears.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="45302"Turning On Automatic Window PlacementID="ch914"By default, you can place windows anywhere on your screen when you open them.  You can change this behavior so that windows are automatically placed in premapped locations on your screen when you open them. Do this by using the Window Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/windows" PARMS=""Windows
 now, or by choosing "Windows" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn on automatic window placement:Click the button  next to "Auto Window Placement."A checkmark appears.Click the Close  button to close the control panel.Some applications may allow you to set preferences for window placement. These preferences will override the global settings. See your application documentation for information on setting window placement for that application.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="84894"Saving Your Desktop LayoutID="ch915"The system keeps track of the windows that are open and their location on the screen. Every time you log in, the system checks the list of windows to determine which ones it should open automatically. It can do one of two things:Automatically open the windows that were on your screen when you logged out. This is the default behavior. See IDREF="65253" TYPE="TITLE""Automatically Saving the Desktop Layout" for more details.Ignore the windows that were open when you logged out. Always open a particular set of windows that you have chosen. See IDREF="96683" TYPE="TITLE""Automatically Opening a Specific Set of Windows" for instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="65253"Automatically Saving the Desktop LayoutBy default, the system opens the windows that were on your screen when you logged out. For example, suppose that you log out while your screen displays a clock, a calendar, and a jot window in which you are editing a text file. When you log into the system again, the clock, calendar, and jot windows automatically reappear.If you change the setting and want to revert to the default behavior, use the Window Settings control panel. If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/windows" PARMS=""Windows
 now, or by choosing "Windows" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.Click the button next to the label Continuously.Click the Close  button to close the window.NoteSome applications will not automatically open when you log in. See IDREF="21902" TYPE="TITLE""Running Applications When You Log In Using the .sgisession File" for information on how to run these applications.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="96683"Automatically Opening a Specific Set of WindowsBy default, the system opens the windows that were on your screen when you logged out. You can change this behavior so the system opens a specific set of windows.Create the screen layout that you want to see each time you log in.Open windows and position them on the screen.Create the desks that you want to have available when you log in. See IDREF="68336" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 7, "Using Desks," for instructions. If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/windows" PARMS=""Windows
 now, or by choosing "Windows" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.Click the button next to the label Explicitly. It appears next to the label Save Windows & Desks.Click the Set Home Session button. This takes a snapshot of the current screen layout.Click the Close  button to close the window.NoteIf you create new desks, you must open the Window Settings control panel and click the Set Home Session button again. Otherwise, when you log out or restart the window manager, you will lose the new desks that you have created.Some applications will not automatically open when you log in. See IDREF="21902" TYPE="TITLE""Running Applications When You Log In Using the .sgisession File" for information on how to run these applications.LBL="" HELPID="language_panel"ID="75903"Changing the Language and Keyboard LayoutID="ch916"U.S. English is the default language for the system. You can choose another language and a corresponding keyboard key layout using the Language Controls panel. If the Language Controls panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/ipanel" PARMS=""Language
 now, or by choosing "Language" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To change the language:Scroll through the list of countries in the Locations list and click on the country whose language corresponds with the language you want.Click the Close button to close the panel.To change the keyboard key layout, click on an abbreviation that corresponds to the language you want; then click Quit to close the panel. Any application you start up after you make the change uses the new language and keyboard layout. Restart other applications if you want them to use the new language and keyboard layout, or log out, then log back in to use the new language and keyboard layout on the desktop.LBL="" HELPID="customicons"ID="87032"Customizing Desktop SettingsThe Desktop Settings control panel lets you customize various desktop characteristics. For details, see:IDREF="82856" TYPE="TITLE""Changing the Default Size of Icons on the Desktop"IDREF="55588" TYPE="TITLE""Displaying New Home Directory File Icons on the Desktop"IDREF="99029" TYPE="TITLE""Choosing a Default Editor"IDREF="54116" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Off Desktop Sounds"IDREF="99623" TYPE="TITLE""Turning Off the Launch Effect"IDREF="32491" TYPE="TITLE""Disabling the Dumpster"IDREF="26861" TYPE="TITLE""Turning File Overwrite Messages On and Off"IDREF="26312" TYPE="TITLE""Displaying Application Errors"IDREF="65478" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Default Permission Settings"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="82856"Changing the Default Size of Icons on the DesktopID="ch917"You can change the default size of icons on the desktop, using the Desktop Settings control panel. If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To change the default size of icons on the desktop:Slide the wheel below  "Desktop Icon Size" back and forth.Place your cursor on top of the wheel.Press down on the left mouse button and move the cursor to the left and right to move the wheel.The icon to the right of the wheel changes size.When you're satisfied with the icon size, click the Close button to close the control panel.The icons appear in the new size.To return icons to the default size, click the small box on the right side of the wheel.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="55588"Displaying New Home Directory File Icons on the DesktopID="ch918"When you create new files in your home directory, you can have the icons for the new files automatically display on your desktop by turning on "Auto-Display New Home Dir. Files" in the Desktop Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn on auto-display of new home directory files:Click the button next to "Auto-Display New Home Dir. Files."A checkmark appears in the box.Click the Close button to close the panel.The next time you create a file in your home directory, the icon for that file will appear on your desktop.To turn off auto-display of new home directory files, click the button next to "Auto-Display New Home Directory Files" to remove the checkmark.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="54116"Turning Off Desktop SoundsID="ch919"Your system ships with desktop sounds turned on. You will hear sounds for different actions you perform, such as double-clicking an icon, or emptying the dumpster. You can turn these sounds off in your environment if you want by using the Desktop Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn off desktop sounds:Click the button next to "Desktop Sounds."The checkmark disappears.Click the Close button to close the panel.Desktop sounds turn off immediately for some applications.  For other applications, you must log out and log back in before the sound turns off.To turn desktop sounds back on, click the button  next to "Audio Feedback." A checkmark appears. Log out, then log back in.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="99623"Turning Off the Launch EffectWhen you start up an application, you see a visual effect that lets you know that the application is starting up. The effect stops when the application opens. The launch effect is turned on by default. You can turn it off using the Desktop Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn off the launch effect:Click the button next to "Launch Effect."The checkmark disappears.Click the Close button to close the panel.Now when you start up an application, you will not see the launch effect. To turn the launch effect back on, click the button  next to "Launch Effect." A checkmark appears.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="32491"Disabling the DumpsterID="ch920"By default, when you choose "Remove" from the Selected menu, the files are moved into the dumpster. These files are stored in the dumpster until you decide to delete them permanently from your system by emptying the dumpster.If you want files to be removed from your system immediately rather than moving them into the dumpster, you can disable the dumpster. When you disable the dumpster,  it becomes an ordinary directory called "dumpster." Now when you choose "Remove" from the Selected menu to remove selected files, these files are deleted from your system.Use the Desktop Settings control panel to disable the dumpster. If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To disable the dumpster:Click the button next to "Remove to Dumpster."The checkmark disappears.Click the Quit button to close the panel.If you want to reenable the dumpster, click the box next to "Remove to Dumpster." The checkmark reappears.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="26861"Turning File Overwrite Messages On and OffID="ch921"By default, when you attempt to overwrite a file, a notifier pops up and asks you if you really want to overwrite the file. If you do not want this notifier to come up, you can turn it off by using the Desktop Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn off the overwrite file notifier:Click the button next to "Warn on File Overwrite."The checkmark disappears.Click the Quit button to close the control panel.To turn on the overwrite file notifier, click the button next to "Warn on File Overwrite." The checkmark reappears.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="26312"Displaying Application ErrorsID="ch922"You can use the Desktop Settings control panel to turn on a status window that displays application errors. If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To turn on the status window:Click the button next to "Display Application Errors."A checkmark appears.Click the Quit button to close the control panel.Next time an error is generated by an application, the status window  appears on your screen, and the error message appears in the window. To turn off the status window, click the button next to "Display Application Errors."  You must log out, then log back in, to disable the status window.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="99029"Choosing a Default EditorID="ch923"Your system ships with a graphical text editor called jot. When you open a text file, jot is the default editor. You can change the default editor by using the Desktop Settings control panel.If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.To choose a default editor:Move the cursor on top of the button next to "Default Editor" and press the left mouse button.A menu appears.Move your cursor on top of one of the choices to choose an editor. Then release the mouse button.If you want to use a text editor that is not listed in the menu, choose "Other..." Then type in the name of the editor you want to use.The editor you chose becomes the default editor.Click the Quit button to close the panel.Any application you start up after you make the change uses the new editor. Restart other applications if you want them to use the new editor.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="65478"Changing Default Permission SettingsID="ch924"By default, whenever you create a new file, default permissions are placed on the file. These default permissions allow you, the owner, to read, write and execute the file. They also allow the group and others to read and execute, but not to make changes to the file.You can change these default permission settings using the Desktop Settings control panel. If the control panel is not already open on your screen, open it by clicking the word APP="/usr/sbin/desktop" PARMS=""Desktop
 now or by choosing "Desktop" from the Customize menu in the Desktop toolchest.These settings affect only files and directories that you create using the desktop tools.  They dp not affect files and directories that you create in  a shell window.To change the default file permission settings:Click  Default File Permissions.The Default File Permissions form appears.Click the buttons below Read, Write, and Exec to set the default permissions for each user.A button is activated when a checkmark appears on the button.Click OK to set the permissions. Click Cancel if you do not want to change the permissions.Click the Quit button to close the Desktop Settings panel.For more information on permissions, see IDREF="29064" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding Permissions."LBL="" HELPID=""Disabling Icons on the DesktopID="ch925"By default, certain icons appear on your desktop. If you prefer not to have icons appear on your desktop, you can disable this function by creating a file called nodesktop in your .desktop_<hostname> directory.To do this:Open a Directory View window of your home directory by choosing "Home Directory" from the Desktop toolchest.Double-click the .desktop_<hostname> directory to open it.The .desktop_<hostname> directory is a "hidden" file. If it is not visible in your home directory, choose "Hidden Files" from the View menu in the Directory View.Create an empty file using your text editor, name it nodesktop, and place it in the .desktop_<hostname> directory.Log out, then log back in.Icons no longer appear on your desktop.If you want to reenable icons on the desktop, delete the nodesktop file. Log out, then log back in. Icons appear on your desktop.LBL="" HELPID="fetch_path_help"ID="31644"Adding Directories to Your PathID="ch926"When you use the "Find an Icon" command to search for an icon, or you search for or run applications in a shell window, the software searches through a series of directories to find the file or application. The series of directories it searches is called your path. You can add directories to your path by editing the .cshrc file.Open a shell by choosing 
"Unix Shell" from the 
Desktop toolchest.Open the .cshrc file.Place the cursor in the shell window.Type cd to move to your home directory. This is where system startup files such as .cshrc are stored.Run a text editor and open the .cshrc  file. For example, type:jot .cshrcLocate the line that begins with the text below, or create it if the line  doesn't exist.set path = ($path Leave a space after "$path"; then type the names of the directories that you want to add. Be sure to leave a blank space between directory names and end the list of directory names with a closing parenthesis.Save the file; then quit from the text editor.Place the cursor in the shell window; then type:source .cshrcThis causes the system to look at the start up file and recognize the new setting. The same thing happens when you log out and log back in again.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="21902"Running Applications When You Log In Using the .sgisession FileID="ch927"You can use the Window Settings control panel to save your desktop layout and have certain applications open automatically when you log in (see IDREF="84894" TYPE="TITLE""Saving Your Desktop Layout"). Some third-party applications, however, may not be recognized by these settings. If you want these applications to start up automatically when you log in, you can create a file in your home directory called .sgisession.To create a .sgisession file:Open a shell by choosing 
"Unix Shell" from the 
Desktop toolchest.Create the .sgisession file.Place the cursor in the shell window.Type cd to move to your home directory. This is where system startup files such as .sgisession are stored.Run a text editor and create the .sgisession  file. For example, type:jot .sgisessionType startup information for applications you want to start up when you log in. For example, if you want to start up an application called "fun," and the application is stored in the /usr/sbin directory, create a line in the file like this:/usr/sbin/funIf you want to add another application, create a new line, and add the startup information for that application.Save and close the file.Next time you log out and log back in, the system will read your .sgisession file and will start up the applications you specified.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="35079"Modifying the ToolchestsID="ch928"A file called system.chestrc exists in your /usr/lib/X11 directory. This file determines the system-wide settings for the toolchests. You can add toolchests and toolchest menu items to your account by creating a file called .auxchestrc in your home directory. This file adds the items you specify to all the items already specified in the system.chestrc file.If you want to customize the toolchests more extensively by adding, deleting, and renaming items, copy the system.chestrc file into your home directory and rename it .chestrc. Then edit this file. The .chestrc file replaces the function of the system.chestrc file for your user account only.NoteThe system.chestrc file allows dynamic menu items in the toolchests. These items appear and disappear depending on which desktop item is selected. When you create a .chestrc file, these dynamic abilities become disabled.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="14489"Understanding the system.chestrc FileThe system.chestrc file contains all the toolchest headings and toolchest menu items that appear on your desktop.Open the system.chestrc file in your /usr/lib/X11 directory. At the top of the file, you see some lines similar to these:Menu ToolChest
{
"Desktop"  f.menu Desktop
no-label   f.separator
"Selected" f.menu Selected
no-label   f.separator
"Find"     f.menu Find
no-label   f.separator
"System"   f.menu System
no-label   f.separator
"Help"    f.menu Help
}This defines the toolchests. The left side lists the names of the toolchests. Notice that the names are enclosed in quotes. The right side describes what happens when you choose a particular item. For example, when you choose the Desktop toolchest, you post the Desktop toolchest menu.Every other line in this section reads:no-label   f.separatorThis draws the line that separates one toolchest from another.Below the definition of the toolchest menu headings, you find sections that describe the contents of each toolchest. Find the section of the file that looks similar to this:Menu Desktop
{
"Desks Overview"      f.checkexec "/usr/sbin/ov"
no-label              f.separator
"Home Directory"      f.checkexec"/usr/lib/desktop/startdesk"
"Remote Directory"     f.checkexec"/usr/lib/desktop/startdesk"
"Customize"           f.menu Customize
"Volume Control"      f.checkexec "/usr/sbin/apanel"
"Empty Dumpster"      f.checkexpr "test \! -f $HOME/.desktop/nodesktop -a -x /usr/lib/desktop/telldesktop" "/usr/lib/desktop/telldesktop 'empty dumpster'"
"Unix Shell"          f.checkexec "/usr/sbin/winterm"
no-label              f.separator
"Log Out"             f.checkexec "/usr/bin/X11/endsession"
}IDREF="84044" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 10-1 shows the Desktop toolchest that this information creates. The structure is identical to that of the top-level. The left side lists the names that appear in the Desktop toolchest. Again, the names are enclosed in quotes and a separator line divides the menu into several groups. The right side describes what happens when you choose a particular item. For example, when you choose 
"Desks Overview," you run the program ov, which opens the Desks Overview window. FILE="desktop.menu.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="10-1"Figure 10-1 ID="84044"Desktop toolchest menuThe word "Desktop" in the first line corresponds to the word "Desktop" in the top-level description.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="68232"Adding Toolchests and Toolchest Menu Items Using the .auxchestrc FileID="ch929"To add toolchests and toolchest menu items, create a file named .auxchestrc and place it in your home directory. Enter items in the format used in the system.chestrc file located in your /usr/lib/X11 directory. See IDREF="14489" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding the system.chestrc File" for information about the system.chestrc file.To add toolchests and toolchest menu items by creating a .auxchestrc file:Open a shell window by choosing "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.Create the .auxchestrc file.Place the cursor in the shell window.Type cd and hit 
<Enter> to move to your home directory.Start the text editor and create the file. For example, type:jot .auxchestrcEnter text specifying the toolchest you want to add.For example, if you wanted to add a new toolchest called "Applications," you would enter the following:Menu ToolChest
{
no-label         f.separator
"Applications"  f.menu Applications
}Enter text specifying the menu items you want to add to that toolchest.For example, if you wanted to add jot to the Applications toolchest menu, you would type the following:Menu Applications
{
"jot"     f.checkexec "/usr/sbin/jot"
}Save and close the .auxchestrc file.Log out, then log back in.The new toolchest named Applications appears with the toolchests, and the menu item "jot" appears in the Applications toolchest menu.LBL="" HELPID=""Adding, Deleting, and Renaming Toolchests and Toolchest Menu Items Using the .chestrc FileID="ch930"If you only want to add toolchests or add menu items to the toolchests, see IDREF="68232" TYPE="TITLE""Adding Toolchests and Toolchest Menu Items Using the .auxchestrc File." If you want to customize the toolchests more extensively by adding, deleting, and renaming items, create a .chestrc file:Open a shell window by choosing "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.Create a file called .chestrc in your home directory by copying the file system.chestrc from your /usr/lib/X11 directory and renaming it. To do this:Place the cursor in the shell window.Type cd and hit 
<Enter> to move to your home directory.Type:cp /usr/lib/X11/system.chestrc .chestrcthen press 
<Enter>.It's very important that you begin by copying and renaming this file, becausethe system.chestrc file determines the system-wide setting for the Toolchest window. If you change this file in the /usr/lib/X11 directory, your changes affect everyone who has a login account on the workstation.if you have a .chestrc file in your home directory, the system reads this file instead of system.chestrc. It's best to add to or delete from a copy of the original so you don't leave out any essential information.NoteThe system.chestrc file allows dynamic menu items in the toolchests. These items appear and disappear depending on which desktop item is selected. When you create a .chestrc file, these dynamic abilities become disabled.Edit the .chestrc file by running the text editor. For example, type:jot .chestrcSince this file is a copy of the system.chestrc file, see IDREF="14489" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding the system.chestrc File" for information on how to interpret the file. You can add, delete, and rename items.When you're finished, save and close the file.Log out, then log back in.The toolchests appear the way you specified in the .chestrc file.If you want to revert to the default Toolchest window, remove the .chestrc file from your home directory or name it something other than .chestrc.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="87698"Using Your Own Customized BackgroundsIf you have a custom background that you want to display using bgpaste, you can display it if you turn off icons on the background and the desktop background tool.To display a custom background using bgpaste:Open a directory view of your home directory by double-clicking the folder icon on your desktop, or by choosing "Home Directory" from the Desktop toolchest.Choose "Hidden Files" from the View menu to see the "." files in your home directory.Open the directory named .desktop-<hostname> and create a file called nodesktop in that directory. This will turn off icons on the background.Place the following line in your .Xdefaults or .Xresources file in your home directory:4Dwm*SG_useBackgrounds: FalseLog out then log back in.When you log back in, the desktop backgrounds and icons on the background are turned off, and you can generate your own background using bgpaste.To turn the desktop backgrounds back on, remove the line 4Dwm*SG_useBackgrounds: False from your .Xdefaults or .Xresources file. To turn icons on the background back on, delete the nodesktop file. Log out, then log back in.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="88851"Turning Off the User EnvironmentYou can turn off the user environment for every account on the system by logging in as root, and typing:/etc/chkconfig desktop offin a shell window. When you log out and log back in, your toolchest will not contain any items specific to the Indigo Magic user environment. Also, session management, desks, and icons on the background will be turned off.To turn the user environment back on, log in as root and type:/etc/chkconfig desktop onin a shell window. Log out, then log back in. The user environment turns back on.LBL="11"ID="91839"ReferenceThis chapter contains reference information about the tools and commands that are a part of the desktop environment. It contains:IDREF="20204" TYPE="TITLE""Anatomy of a Window"IDREF="15640" TYPE="TITLE""About the Toolchests"IDREF="94430" TYPE="TITLE""The Directory View Window: An Overview"IDREF="42906" TYPE="TITLE""The Desks Overview Window: An Overview"IDREF="51741" TYPE="TITLE""The Launch Window"IDREF="30386" TYPE="TITLE""The Search Tool: An Overview"IDREF="36123" TYPE="TITLE""The Icon Catalog: An Overview"IDREF="77457" TYPE="TITLE""Anatomy of the Color Scheme Browser Window"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="20204" Anatomy of a WindowID="ch101"Most of the windows that appear on your screen have standard fixtures. This section lists fixtures that you'll see on many different windows. IDREF="30312" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 11-1 shows a window and labels some of the common fixtures. FILE="winstruct.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="11-1"Figure 11-1 ID="30312"A window with the common fixtures labeled.You can use the fixtures labeled in IDREF="30312" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 11-1 to manipulate windows in a variety of ways. See IDREF="31412" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 8, "Managing Windows."NoteOccasionally, you see a window that's missing these fixtures. Such a window is called a borderless window.LBL="" HELPID=""The Title BarID="ch102"The title bar allows you to move, raise, and lower windows. Place the cursor in the title bar; then press the left mouse button and drag to move the window.Place the cursor in the title bar; then click the left mouse button to raise the window to the top of the stack of windows.Place the cursor in the title bar; then press the 
<Ctrl> key and left mouse button simultaneously to lower the window to the bottom of the stack of windows.LBL="" HELPID=""The Window Menu ButtonID="ch103"The Window menu button lets you access the 
Window menu and provides a shortcut for closing windows.Place the cursor over the button and press the left mouse button to see the 
Window menu. Double-click the button with the left mouse button to close the window.LBL="" HELPID=""The Minimize ButtonID="ch104"You click the Minimize button with the left mouse button to turn the window into a small, square icon. This doesn't close the window or stop any of the programs that are running. It turns it into an icon that takes up less screen space.LBL="" HELPID=""The Maximize ButtonID="ch105"You click the Maximize button with the left mouse button to make the window as large as it can be. Some windows become as large as the screen; others change only slightly. If a window doesn't change or becomes smaller when you click the Maximize button, the window was already at its largest size. To restore a maximized window to its original size, click the Maximize button again.LBL="" HELPID=""The BorderID="ch106"You use the border in conjunction with the mouse buttons and keyboard keys to manipulate the window in a variety of ways:Place the cursor on the border; then press the right mouse button to open the Window menu. Place the cursor on the border. When you see a resize cursor, drag the mouse to resize the window.Place the cursor on the border; then press the middle mouse button and drag to move the window.Place the cursor on the border; then press the left mouse button to raise the window.Place the cursor on the border; then press the 
<Ctrl> key and left mouse button simultaneously to lower the window.LBL="" HELPID=""The Scroll BarsID="ch107"You can see windows with scroll bars along the left or right and top or bottom edge. These indicate that the window is too small to display all of its contents. Use the scroll bar to view hidden portions of the window.LBL="" HELPID=""The Drop PocketID="ch108"A drop pocket is the small square into which you can drop icons. Here are several ways in which you can use drop pockets:Drag a folder icon and place it into the drop pocket on a Directory View window. The window displays the contents of that folder.Drag a file or application icon and place it in the drop pocket on a Directory View window. The window displays the contents of the directory in which that icon is stored. For example, suppose you drag the IRIS Showcase icon into the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of the /usr/sbin directory.Drag an IRIS Showcase icon and drop it into a drop pocket on the Search tool to specify the type of files you want to findname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'in this case, IRIS Showcase files.You can also drag icons out of the drop pocket and place them onto the desktop, onto a shelf, or into the Icon Catalog.LBL="" HELPID=""The Pathname FieldID="ch109"The pathname field shows the full pathname of the directory whose icon or contents are displayed in the window. You can type a new name in this field to display the contents of a different directory. See IDREF="88041" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the Icon Finder."LBL="" HELPID=""The Path BarID="ch1010"The path bar lets you move from one directory to another, without typing. It contains a small button representing each directory in the pathname. See IDREF="39625" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 11-2.FILE="pathbar.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="11-2"Figure 11-2 ID="39625"Using the path bar.LBL="" HELPID=""The Recycle ButtonID="ch1011"The Recycle button keeps a list of names you have specified in a type-in field. For example, place the cursor over the Recycle button on a Directory View window; then press the left mouse button to see a list of directories whose contents you have previously displayed in the window. Choose an item from this list and the window changes to display the contents of that directory.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="15640"About the ToolchestsThe stack of toolchests appears in the upper left corner of the screen. It is similar to a phone book. It provides a listing of most all system functions and programs. Move the cursor over a label on a toolchest; then press the left or right mouse button to pop up a menu.LBL="" HELPID=""The Desktop ToolchestID="ch1012"The Desktop toolchest contains commands that let you create and customize desks, open directories, adjust the volume, log out, and more.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Desks Overview" CommandID="ch1013"The Desks Overview window shows you the available desks and lets you create and rearrange your own desks. Choose the "Desks Overview" command to open this window. See IDREF="68336" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 7, "Using Desks," for detailed instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Home Directory" CommandID="ch1014"The "Home Directory" command opens a Directory View window that shows the contents of your home directory. You can also open your home directory by double-clicking the folder icon that appears on the desktop.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Remote Directory" CommandID="ch1015"If your system is on a network, you can open a directory on another system in the network. To do so, choose the "Remote Directory" command. A form appears into which you type the name of the directory you want to open. For more detailed instructions, see IDREF="77123" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Files From One System to Another Using Directory View Windows."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Customize" CommandID="ch1016"The "Customize" rollover menu lists the control panels that you can use to customize the desktopname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'change the background or screen saver, adjust the mouse setting, and more.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Audio Control" CommandID="ch1017"The "Audio Control" command opens the Audio Control Panel. Use this to adjust the volume. LBL="" HELPID=""The "Empty Dumpster" CommandID="ch1018"Deleting files is a two-step process. You place the files in the dumpster; then you use the "Empty Dumpster" command to empty the dumpster. At this point, the files are permanently deleted from the system's disk. LBL="" HELPID=""The "Unix Shell" CommandID="ch1019"The shell is the traditional interface to UNIX workstations. It is a window in which you type IRIX commands. To open a shell, choose the "Unix Shell" command. Also see IDREF="64659" TYPE="TITLE"Appendix A, "Using IRIX Commands."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Log Out" CommandID="ch1020"Choose the "Log Out" command when you are finished using the system and want to ready it for another user. LBL="" HELPID=""The Selected ToolchestID="ch1021"The Selected toolchest contains commands that affect icons on the desktop. Select an icon on the desktop; then choose an item from the menu.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Open Icon" CommandID="ch1022"The "Open Icon" command opens a selected icon and displays its contents in a window. If you open a folder icon, you see a Directory View window that shows the contents of that directory. If you open a file icon, you can edit or view the file.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Make Copy" CommandID="ch1023"The "Make Copy" command makes a copy of the selected icon. The copy is named copy_of_filename. If the selected icon is on a shelf, the copy appears on the shelf and in the directory that contains the original icon. The same is true for the desktop and Icon Catalog. The copy appears on the desktop or the Icon Catalog page, as well as in the directory that contains the original icon.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Make Linked Copy" CommandID="ch1024"The "Make Linked Copy" command makes a linked copy of the selected icon. A link lets you access an icon from several different places, and give it a unique name in each place. When you make a linked copy, a copy of the icon appears next to the original one. It's named link_to_filename and has an "L" next to the icon. NoteYou do not need to make a linked copy to access an icon from several different places. You can place an icon on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog. Doing so gives you another reference to or place from which to access the icon. See also IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons" and IDREF="15568" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked Copies."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Remove" CommandID="ch1025"The "Remove" command removes the selected icon and places it in the dumpster directory. Placing a file in the dumpster is the first step to deleting the file from your computer's disk. See IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files."NoteYou can change the behavior of the "Remove" command so that it deletes files rather than moving them into the dumpster. See IDREF="32491" TYPE="TITLE""Disabling the Dumpster."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Print" CommandID="ch1026"The "Print" command sends the contents of the selected icon to your default printer. If you select a folder icon, you print a list of the files in that directory. If you select a file, you print the contents of the file (text or images, for example).See also IDREF="82889" TYPE="TITLE""Printing Files."LBL="" HELPID=""The "New Directory" CommandID="ch1027"The "New Directory" command creates a new directory labeled empty.dir. The folder icon appears in the window from which you choose the "New Directory" command. If you choose "New Directory" from the Selected toolchest, the folder icon appears on the desktop and is stored in your home directory. See also IDREF="90910" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Directory."LBL="" HELPID=""The "File Permissions" CommandID="ch1028"The "File Permissions" command displays a form that lets you control who can and cannot view or edit a file or directory. For detailed instructions on changing file permissions, see IDREF="90048" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 9, "Sharing and Protecting Work."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Get Info" CommandID="ch1029"The "Get Info" command displays a form that shows detailed information about the selected file, folder, or application icon. The command is gray and inaccessible if you have selected another type of icon.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Find an Icon" CommandID="ch1030"The "Find an Icon" command opens a window into which you can type the name of an icon you want to find. For example, suppose you want to place the IRIS Showcase icon on the shelf for a a particular Directory View window. Choose "Find an Icon"; then type showcase in the type-in field. The icon appears. For further details, see IDREF="96395" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Command."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Put Away Icon" CommandID="ch1031"If you don't want an icon to appear on the desktop any longer, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon." The icon disappears from the desktop but the file is not deleted.The "Put Away Icon" command lets you take selected icons off of the desktop. See IDREF="70468" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelf" and IDREF="60496" TYPE="TITLE""Putting Away an Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Show Path" CommandID="ch1032"The "Show Path" command displays the folder in which that icon is actually located. For example, suppose you have the IRIS Showcase icon on a desktop. Select the icon; then choose "Show Path." A folder named sbin appears, and a thin line connects the IRIS Showcase icon to this folder. To hide the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Hide Path" CommandID="ch1033"When you choose "Show Path," a thin line appears between the selected icon and the folder in which it's stored. Choose "Hide Path" and the connecting line disappears. To put away the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Empty Dumpster" CommandID="ch1034"Deleting files is a two-step process. You place the files in the dumpster; then you use the "Empty Dumpster" command to empty the dumpster. At this point, the files are permanently deleted from the system's disk. See also IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files."NoteThe "Empty Dumpster "command appears only when you select the dumpster icon on the desktop.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Share..." CommandID="ch1035"The "Share..." command appears on the toolchest when you select a folder icon. Choose this command if you want to let people who are logged in to other systems on the network access the selected directory from their own desktops. The Share window appears. Click the Help button on the window for further instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""The Find ToolchestID="ch1036"The Find toolchest contains a collection of tools that will help you find iconsname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'file icons, application icons, and system icons, for example.LBL="" HELPID=""The "An Icon" CommandID="ch1037"This command is equivalent to the "Find an Icon" command that appears on the Selected menu. It opens a window into which you can type the name of an icon you want to find. For example, suppose you want to place the IRIS Showcase icon on the shelf for a a particular Directory View window. Choose "Find an Icon"; then type showcase in the type-in field. The icon appears. For further details, see IDREF="96395" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Command."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Search For" CommandThe Search tool lets you search for files, printers, tape and disk drives, users, and other systems on the network. Choose an item from the Search For rollover menu to open the Search tool and display a particular set of search controls.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Applications" CommandThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. Choose "Applications" to open the Icon Catalog and display the page that shows the available applications.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Collaboration" CommandThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. Choose "Collaboration" to open the Icon Catalog and display the page that shows the icons for applications that let you communicate with other users.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Demos" CommandThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. Choose "Demos" to open the Icon Catalog and display the page that shows the available demos.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Desktop Tools" CommandThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. Choose "Desktop Tools" to open the Icon Catalog and display the page that shows the available tools, such as calendars, clocks, and screen snapshot tools.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Media Tools" CommandThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. Choose "Media Tools" to open the Icon Catalog and display the page that shows the tools available for working with multimedia.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Control Panels" CommandThe Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. Choose "Control Panels" to open the Icon Catalog and display the page that shows the available control panels.LBL="" HELPID=""The System ToolchestID="ch1038"The System toolchest contains commands that let you access the system management tools. See the Personal System Administration Guide for information on these tools and system administration tasks.LBL="" HELPID=""The Help ToolchestID="ch1039"The Help toolchest contains a collection of online documents.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Desktop Help" CommandID="ch1040"The "Desktop Help" command opens a window that contains a listing of system-level help. Choose this command when you need to perform a task but are uncertain which tool to use or how to begin.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Online Books" CommandID="ch1041"The "Online Books" command opens the IRIS InSight Document Library. Once the IRIS InSight Document Library is open, you can type in a word or phrase and quickly find and open the books that contain the information you need. See the IRIS InSight online help for instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Man Pages" CommandID="ch1042"The "Man Pages" command opens a browser you use to view manual pages. A manual page, frequently called a "reference page (man page)," contains reference information about IRIX commands. LBL="" HELPID=""The "Release Notes" CommandID="ch1043"The "Release Notes" command opens a browser you can use to view online release notes. Each software product has an associated release note. Typically, the release note contains installation information as well as a list of known bugs and ways to work around them.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Legal Notice" CommandID="ch1044"The "Legal Notice" command opens a window that contains software copyright information.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_overview"ID="94430"The Directory View Window: An OverviewDirectory View windows appear when you open a folder icon. They display the files and directories that a particular directory contains. By default, the contents are displayed as icons. You can change the view so the icons are arranged as a list or in columns.The main portion of each Directory View window is green. You can also display a blue portion of the window, which is called a shelf. The shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while working in that directory. For details, see IDREF="70468" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelf."LBL="" HELPID=""Anatomy of a Directory View WindowThis section explains each portion of a Directory View window. LBL="" HELPID=""The ToolbarID="ch1045"The toolbar appears along the left edge of the Directory View window. Click the buttons on the toolbar to change the way icons are displayed in the window.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_icon"The Display as Icons ButtonID="ch1046"Click this button to display the contents of a directory as icons. This button is equivalent to the "as Icons" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_list"The Display as List ButtonID="ch1047"When you open a folder icon, the contents of the directory appear as icons. Click this button to view the icons as a sorted list. This button is equivalent to the "as List" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_column"The Display in Columns ButtonID="ch1048"Click this button to organize the icons in a window into columns. This button is equivalent to the "as Columns" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_previmg"The Preview Images ButtonID="ch1049"If a directory contains image files, click this button and the file icon will be replaced with a small snapshot of the image. This button is equivalent to the "as Gallery" command on the View menu. NoteWhen you leave the directory, the icons revert to the standard image file icons. This allows the window to display more quickly the next time you open that directory. LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_dispshelf"The Display Shelf ButtonID="ch1050"Click this button to display a shelf along the bottom of the Directory View window. The shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while working in that directory. For example, if the directory contains many files, you might want to place the files you use most frequently on the shelf. Or, if the directory contains many color Showcase slides, you might want to place the icon for a color printer onto the shelf.This button is equivalent to the "Shelf" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_thumbwheel"The ThumbwheelID="ch1051"Use the thumbwheel to change the size of icons in that window. Place the cursor over the thumbwheel; then drag the cursor up to make the icons smaller or down to make the icons larger. To revert to the original size, click the small box below the thumbwheel.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="83392"The Icon FinderLBL="" HELPID="fmcon_droppok"The Drop PocketID="ch1052"The drop pocket is the small blue square to the left of the pink type-in field. When you place an icon in the drop pocket, the Directory View window changes. Drag a folder icon and place it in the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of that folder.Drag a file or application icon and place it in the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of the directory in which that icon is stored. For example, suppose you drag the IRIS Showcase icon into the drop pocket. The window displays the contents of the /usr/sbin directory.You can also drag icons out of the drop pocket and place them onto the desktop, onto a shelf, or into the Icon Catalog.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_pathfield"ID="99454"The Pathname FieldID="ch1053"The pathname field shows the list of directories that leads you from the root (/) directory to the directory whose contents are displayed in the window. You can type a new name in this field to display the contents of a different directory. See IDREF="88041" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Directory Using the Icon Finder."If your system is on a network, you can type the name of a remote directory. To do so, type /hosts/remotesystemname followed by the name of the directory you want to open. If the system is in a different domain of the network, include the domain name after the hostname. For example, to open the /usr/tmp directory on a system named wizard.bldg2, type: /hosts/wizard.bldg2/usr/tmp.NoteYou cannot open remote directories in this fashion if automount, a system setting, is disabled. To check this setting, open a shell window by choosing "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest. In the shell window, type: chkconfig. Look for the word "automount" in the left column.If automount is enabled, the word "on" appears in the right column. If it is disabled, the word "off" appears. Contact the Administrator if the setting needs to be changed.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_pathbar"The Path BarID="ch1054"The path bar is the thin gray bar above the pathname field. It lets you move from one directory to another, without typing. It contains a small button representing each directory in the pathname. Click a button to display the contents of that directory. See IDREF="60723" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure 11-3.FILE="pathbar.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="11-3"Figure 11-3 ID="60723"Using the path bar.LBL="" HELPID="fm_namematch"The Match Name FieldThe Match Name field appears when you choose "Filters" from the View menu. Use it to limit the number of icons you see in the Directory View window. For example, to display only files that begin with "d," type d. To display only files that end in ".rgb," type *.rgb.LBL="" HELPID="fm_contentmatch"The Match Pattern FieldThe Match Pattern field appears when you choose "Filters" from the View menu. Use it to display text files that contain a certain string of text. ASCII text files and mail files are searched; other document types are not searched.LBL="" HELPID="fm_showall"The Show All ButtonThe Show All button appears when you choose "Filters" from the View menu. Click it if you want to display all icons and ignore text in the Match Name and Match Content fields.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_scrollbar"The Scroll BarsID="ch1055"Scroll bars appear when a window is too small to display all of its contents. Drag the scroll bar to view the portions of the window that are hidden. LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_sash"The Window SashID="ch1056"The window sash appears when you display the shelf on a Directory View window. It splits the window into two panes. Use the sash to make the shelf larger or smaller.Place the cursor over the small box; then press the left mouse button and drag the cursor up and down. A line shows how you're resizing the window panes. Release the mouse button. The window panes change size.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_shelf"The ShelfID="ch1057"The shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while working in a particular directory. For example, if the directory contains many files, you might want to place the files you use most frequently on the shelf. Or, if the directory contains many color Showcase slides, you might want to place the icon for a color printer onto the shelf. See IDREF="70468" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelf" for instructions.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_recycle"The Recycle ButtonID="ch1058"Place the cursor over the Recycle button; then press the left mouse button to see a list of directories whose contents you have displayed in the window. Choose an item from this list and the window changes to display the contents of that directory.LBL="" HELPID="fm_aboutmenus"About Menus on a Directory View WindowThis section provides basic information on each menu and its commands. Click an item in the list to get information on a particular menu.IDREF="13502" TYPE="TITLE""The Selected Menu on a Directory View Window"IDREF="35931" TYPE="TITLE""The Arrange Menu on a Directory View Window"IDREF="31683" TYPE="TITLE""The View Menu on a Directory View Window"LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_selmenu"ID="13502"The Selected Menu on a Directory View WindowID="ch1059"Commands on the Selected menu affect the icons in the window that are selected. The selected icons are highlighted yellow. You can also access this menu by placing the cursor over the Directory View window, and then pressing the right mouse button.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Open Icon" CommandID="ch1060"The "Open Icon" command opens a selected icon and displays its contents in a window. If you open a folder icon, you see a window that shows the contents of that directory. If you open a file icon, you can edit or view the file.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Make Copy" CommandID="ch1061"The "Make Copy" command makes a copy of the selected icon. The copy is named copy_of_filename. If the selected icon is on a shelf, the copy appears on the shelf and in the directory to which the shelf is attached.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Make Linked Copy" CommandID="ch1062"The "Make Linked Copy" command makes a linked copy of the selected icon. A link lets you access an icon from several different places, and give it a unique name in each place. When you make a linked copy, a copy of the icon appears next to the original one. It's named link_to_filename and has an "L" next to the icon. NoteYou do not need to make a linked copy to access an icon from several different places. You can place an icon on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog. Doing so gives you another reference to or place from which to access the icon. See also IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons" and IDREF="15568" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked Copies."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Remove" CommandID="ch1063"The "Remove" command removes the selected icon from a directory and places it in the dumpster directory. Once an icon is in the dumpster, you can delete it by choosing "Empty Dumpster" from the Desktop toolchest.NoteYou can change the behavior of the "Remove" command so that it deletes files rather than moving them into the dumpster. See IDREF="32491" TYPE="TITLE""Disabling the Dumpster."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Print" CommandID="ch1064"The "Print" command sends the contents of the selected icon to your default printer. If you select a folder icon, you print a list of the files in that directory. If you select a file, you print the contents of the file (text or images, for example).See also IDREF="25430" TYPE="TITLE""Printing Files."LBL="" HELPID=""The "New Directory" CommandID="ch1065"The "New Directory" command creates a new directory labeled empty.dir. The folder icon appears in the window from which you choose the "New Directory" command. If you choose "New Directory" from the Selected toolchest, the folder icon appears on the desktop and is stored in your home directory. See also IDREF="90910" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Directory."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Permissions" CommandID="ch1066"The "Permissions" command displays a form that lets you control who can and cannot view or edit a file or directory. For detailed instructions on changing file permissions, see IDREF="90048" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 9, "Sharing and Protecting Work."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Get Info" CommandID="ch1067"The "Get Info" command displays a form that shows detailed information about the selected file, folder, or application icon. The command is gray and inaccessible if you have selected another type of icon.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Find an Icon" CommandID="ch1068"The "Find an Icon" command opens a window into which you can type the name of an icon you want to find. For example, suppose you want to place the IRIS Showcase icon on the shelf for a a particular Directory View window. Choose "Find an Icon"; then type showcase in the type-in field. The icon appears. For further details, see IDREF="96395" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Command."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Put Away Icon" CommandID="ch1069"Each Directory View window has a shelf that you can choose to display and hide. The shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while in a particular directory. The "Put Away Icon" command lets you take icons off of the shelf. See IDREF="70468" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelf" and IDREF="60496" TYPE="TITLE""Putting Away an Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="43116"The "Show Path" CommandID="ch1070"Each Directory View window has a shelf that you can choose to display and hide. The shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while in a particular directory. Unlike a Directory View window, which shows only the icons actually stored in a particular directory, the shelf can contain a collection of icons that come fromname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'are stored inname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'a variety of directories. The "Show Path" command displays the folder in which the icon on the shelf is actually located. For example, suppose you have the IRIS Showcase icon on a shelf. Select the icon; then choose "Show Path." A folder named sbin appears, and a thin line connects the IRIS Showcase icon to this folder. To hide the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="58243"The "Hide Path" CommandID="ch1071"When you choose "Show Path," a thin line appears between the selected icon and the folder in which it's stored. Choose "Hide Path" and the connecting line disappears. To put away the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Empty Dumpster" CommandID="ch1072"The "Empty Dumpster "command appears when you select the dumpster icon. The command only appears on windows that contain the selected dumpster icon. For example, the dumpster icon appears in your home directory. Select the dumpster icon there, and the command appears on that Selected menu. Select the dumpster icon on the desktop, and "Empty Dumpster" appears on the Selected toolchest.See also IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Share..." CommandID="ch1073"The "Share..." command appears on the menu when you select a folder icon. Choose this command if you want to let people who are logged in to other systems on the network access the selected directory from their own desktops. The Share window appears. Click the Help button on the window for further instructions.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_arrmenu"ID="35931"The Arrange Menu on a Directory View WindowThe Arrange menu contains commands that change the way icons are sorted, or arranged, in the window.LBL="" HELPID=""The "by Name" CommandID="ch1074"The "by Name" command arranges icons alphabetically; numerals, then capital letters, then lowercase letters.LBL="" HELPID=""The "by Date" CommandID="ch1075"The "by Date" command arranges icons in the window according to the date on which they were last modified.LBL="" HELPID=""The "by Size" CommandID="ch1076"The "by Size" command arranges icons in the window according to size (in bytes, from smallest to largest).LBL="" HELPID=""The "by Type" CommandID="ch1077"The "by Type" command arranges icons by type.LBL="" HELPID=""The "to Grid" CommandID="ch1078"The "to Grid" command snaps the icons to an invisible grid so they are in neat rows and columns.LBL="" HELPID="fmcon_viewmenu"ID="31683"The View Menu on a Directory View WindowThe View menu contains commands that change the way icons are placed in the window. Each command is equivalent to one of the buttons on the toolbar.LBL="" HELPID=""The "as Icons" CommandID="ch1079"Choose the "as Icons" command to display the contents of a directory as icons scattered throughout the window. LBL="" HELPID=""The "as Columns" CommandID="ch1080"Choose "as Columns" from the View menu to organize the icons in a window into columns. Only the icon name appears. Choose "as List" to see the size and modification date and time.LBL="" HELPID=""The "as List" CommandID="ch1081"When you open a folder icon, the contents of the directory appear as icons. Choose the "as List" command to view the contents as a sorted list. The list includesthe icon name. Tape and disk drive icons include the name of the system to which the device is connected. File icons include the full pathname so you know the directory in which the icon is stored.the size of the icon in bytesthe date and time at which the icon was modifiedChoose the "as Icons" command if you have changed the display and want to return to the default.LBL="" HELPID=""The "as Gallery" CommandID="ch1082"If a Directory View window contains image files, choose "as Gallery" and each image file icon is replaced with a small snapshot of the image.NoteWhen you leave the directory, the icons revert to the standard image file icons. This allows the window to display more quickly the next time you open that directory. LBL="" HELPID=""The "Shelf" CommandID="ch1083"The "Shelf" command displays a new area of the Directory View window. A checkmark appears next to the command when it's selected. The shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while working in a particular directory. For example, if the directory contains many files, you might want to place the files you use most frequently on the shelf. Or, if the directory contains many color Showcase slides, you might want to place the icon for a color printer onto the shelf. See IDREF="70468" TYPE="TITLE""Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelf" for instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Hidden Files" CommandID="ch1084"Many IRIX configuration files are hidden by default. You do not see them in a Directory View window. These files are commonly called dot files because a "." appears as the first character in the filename. Your .login and .cshrc files are examples of hidden files. You can choose to view or hide these files using the "Hidden Files" command. A checkmark next to the command indicates that the files are displayed in that Directory View window.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Filters" CommandThe "Filters" command reveals a new set of controls in the Directory View window.LBL="" HELPID=""The "Preserve Layout" CommandChoose "Preserve Layout" if you want to maintain the same view of icons when you switch from one directory to another in a particular window. A red checkmark indicates it's activated. For example, suppose you're viewing the contents of your home directory as a list of icons. By default, if you change directories and view the /usr/people directory, you revert to the default view of icons. To retain the list view, choose "Preserve Layout."LBL="" HELPID="fm_shortcuts"Keyboard Shortcuts for Directory View WindowsID="ch1085"Many commands in a Directory View window have both a keyboard and a mnemonic shortcut. Standard keyboard shortcuts are listed on the right side of the menu; mnemonic shortcuts are indicated by an underlined letter. The following table lists the keyboard and mnemonic shortcuts.COLUMNS="3"LEFT="0" WIDTH="101"CommandLEFT="110" WIDTH="101"Keyboard ShortcutLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"MnemonicLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Open Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-oLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; oLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Make Copy"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-cLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Make Linked Copy"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Remove"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; rLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Print"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-pLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; pLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""New Directory"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Permissions"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-eLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; eLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Get Info"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-iLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; i LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Find an Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-fLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; f LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Put Away Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; a LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Show Path"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; s LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Hide Path"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; hLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Name"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Date"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Size"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Type"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; tLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""to Grid"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Icons"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; iLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as List"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Columns"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Gallery"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Shelf"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Ignore Layout"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; iLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Click for Help"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Shift>-<F1>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-h; cLBL="11-1"Table 11-1 Shortcuts for commands on Directory View windows.The following techniques also serve as shortcuts:Press the 
<Ctrl> key while dragging an icon to make a copy of the icon.Press the 
<Alt> key while double-clicking a folder icon to display the contents of the directory in the current window.Instead of double-clicking folder icons, enter the pathname of the directory you want to open in the pathname field at the top of a Directory View window.LBL="" HELPID="ov_deskoverview"ID="42906"The Desks Overview Window: An OverviewID="ch1086"The Desks Overview window provides the controls you need to use desks easily and effectively. The Desks Overview window displays a miniature picture or button that represents each desk. Double-click these to go from one desk to another; drag items between the snapshots to move or copy windows and icons from desk to desk.Use commands on the Overview window to change the way that desks are displayed in the window. Use commands on the Desks menu to create, rename, and delete desks.Use commands on the Window menu to manipulate windows on the desk.Please also see IDREF="90655" TYPE="TITLE""A Legal Notice Regarding the Desks Overview Tool."LBL="" HELPID=""Anatomy of the Desks Overview WindowThis section explains each portion of the Desks Overview window.LBL="" HELPID="ovcon_display"The Desk Display AreaID="ch1087"This area of the Desks Overview window displays a snapshot or button for each of your desks. Double-click a snapshot or button to go to that desk.By default, desks are displayed as snapshots. The snapshot shows a miniature version of each window and icon on the desk. You can drag windows between the snapshots to move them from desk to desk. Additionally, you can move items on the screen by moving the miniature window in the snapshot.The buttons are smaller than the snapshots. You can only use them to go from one desk to another. To display the desks as buttons, choose "Hide Snapshots" from the Overview menu.You can resize the buttons or snapshots using the "Scaling" command on the Desk menu. See IDREF="18463" TYPE="TITLE""Resizing Snapshots or Buttons" for details.LBL="" HELPID="ovcon_global"The Global DeskID="ch1088"The global desk acts as a template for all other desks. Any windows that you place on the global desk will automatically appear on all of your desks. See IDREF="49744" TYPE="TITLE""Placing a Window in All Desks" for details.You can hide the global desk if you don't need to work with it frequently. To do so, choose "Hide Global Desk" from the Overview menu. To display it again, choose "Show Global Desk."LBL="" HELPID="ov_aboutmenus"About Menus on the Desks Overview WindowThis section provides basic information on each menu and its commands. Click an item in the list to get information on a particular menu.IDREF="24277" TYPE="TITLE""The Overview Menu"IDREF="50640" TYPE="TITLE""The Desk Menu"IDREF="20975" TYPE="TITLE""The Window Menu"LBL="" HELPID="ovcon_overmenu"ID="24277"The Overview MenuID="ch1089"The Overview menu contains commands for changing the appearance of the Desks Overview window. Click an item in the list for details on that command.IDREF="68133" TYPE="TITLE""The "Hide Menubar/Show Menubar" Command"IDREF="48539" TYPE="TITLE""The "Hide Global Desk/Show Global Desk Command"IDREF="90601" TYPE="TITLE""The "Show Snapshots/Hide Snapshots" Command"IDREF="39556" TYPE="TITLE""The "Display Window Name" Command"IDREF="76516" TYPE="TITLE""The "Display Icon Name" Command"IDREF="54765" TYPE="TITLE""The "Display No Names" Command"IDREF="73602" TYPE="TITLE""The "Quit" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="68133"The "Hide Menubar/Show Menubar" CommandID="ch1090"Choose the "Hide Menubar" command to make the menu bar disappear. When the menu bar is hidden, you can make the Desks Overview window slightly smaller. You can still access the menus via a pop-up menu. Place the cursor in the window; then press the right mouse button to reveal a pop-up menu. Choose the "Show Menubar" command to show the menu bar again.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="48539"The "Hide Global Desk/Show Global Desk CommandID="ch1091"By default, a snapshot of the global desk appears in the Desks Overview window. If you don't need to use this desk frequently, choose "Hide Global Desk." To show the global desk again, choose "Show Global Desk."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="90601"The "Show Snapshots/Hide Snapshots" CommandID="ch1092"Choose "Hide Snapshots" to display each desk as a button in the Desks Overview window.Choose "Show Snapshots" to display each desk as a snapshot in the Desks Overview window. A snapshot is a small picture that contains a miniature version of each window on the desk. You can drag windows from one snapshot to another to copy and move windows from desk to desk.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="39556"The "Display Window Name" CommandID="ch1093"By default, a snapshot for each desk appears in the Desks Overview window. When you pass the cursor over a window in the snapshot, the name of the window appears. Choose "Display Window Name" if you want to display the name that appears in the title bar of the window.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="76516"The "Display Icon Name" CommandID="ch1094"By default, a snapshot for each desk appears in the Desks Overview window. When you pass the cursor over a window in the snapshot, the name of the window appears. Choose "Display Icon Name" if you want to see the name that appears on the window when it is minimized or stowed.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="54765"The "Display No Names" CommandID="ch1095"By default, a snapshot for each desk appears in the Desks Overview window. When you pass the cursor over a window in the snapshot, the name of the window appears. Choose "Display No Names" if you don't want these names to appear.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="73602"The "Quit" CommandID="ch1096"Choose the "Quit" command when you are finished using the Desks Overview window. The window disappears from all of your desks.LBL="" HELPID="ovcon_deskmenu"ID="50640"The Desk MenuID="ch1097"The Desk menu contains commands that let you create new desks, copy, rename, and delete desks, and make the contents of the Desks Overview window smaller or larger. Click an item in the list for details on that command.IDREF="31343" TYPE="TITLE""The "New Desk" Command"IDREF="90370" TYPE="TITLE""The "Copy Selected" Command"IDREF="39399" TYPE="TITLE""The "Rename Selected" Command"IDREF="98570" TYPE="TITLE""The "Goto Selected" Command"IDREF="59582" TYPE="TITLE""The "Delete Selected" Command"IDREF="37906" TYPE="TITLE""The "Scaling" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="31343"The "New Desk" CommandID="ch1098"Choose the "New Desk" Command when you want to create a new desk. A new desk appears in the Desks Overview window; it's labeled "Desk #." For instance, suppose you have three existing desks. Create a new desk and it's named "Desk 4."See IDREF="94080" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming a Desk" to learn how to rename the desk. See IDREF="50951" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Desk" to get step-by-step instructions for creating a new desk.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="90370"The "Copy Selected" CommandID="ch1099"Select a desk in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Copy Selected" command to copy an existing desk. Step-by-step instructions follow.Place the cursor over a desk in the Desks Overview window; then click the left mouse button to select it. A yellow outline surrounds the selected desk. Choose "Copy Selected" from the Desks menu. A copy of the desk appears in the Desks Overview window. The label "Copy of" is added to the beginning of the desk name.See IDREF="94080" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming a Desk" to learn how to rename the desk.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="39399"The "Rename Selected" CommandID="ch10100"Select a desk in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Rename Selected" command to rename a desk. IDREF="94080" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming a Desk" provides step-by-step instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="98570"The "Goto Selected" CommandID="ch10101"Select a desk in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Goto Selected" command to switch to that desk. See IDREF="53253" TYPE="TITLE""Switching Between Desks" for more details.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="59582"The "Delete Selected" CommandID="ch10102"Select a desk in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Delete Selected" command to delete the desk. The desk disappears from the Desks Overview window.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="37906"The "Scaling" CommandID="ch10103"The commands on the Scaling rollover menu let you make the snapshots or buttons in the Desks Overview window smaller or larger. The first five commandsname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, and 10%name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'are pre-defined. The last command, "Custom," lets you choose a custom setting. The percentage you choose appears next to the "User defined" command. IDREF="18463" TYPE="TITLE""Resizing Snapshots or Buttons" provides step-by-step instructions.LBL="" HELPID="ovcon_winmenu"ID="20975"The Window MenuID="ch10104"The commands on the Window menu let you manipulate windowsname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'get a list of all the windows, minimize the windows, and more. Click an item in the list for details on that command.IDREF="60811" TYPE="TITLE""The "List All..." Command"IDREF="65853" TYPE="TITLE""The "Restore All" Command"IDREF="80974" TYPE="TITLE""The "Minimize All" Command"IDREF="48555" TYPE="TITLE""The "Add to Global" Command"IDREF="51271" TYPE="TITLE""The "Remove from Desk" Command"IDREF="73388" TYPE="TITLE""The "Minimize" Command"IDREF="52973" TYPE="TITLE""The "Restore" Command"IDREF="93701" TYPE="TITLE""The "Raise" Command"IDREF="53267" TYPE="TITLE""The "Lower" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="60811"The "List All..." CommandID="ch10105"Choose the "List All..." command to get a list of all the windows that are open. You can use this list to copy a window to your current desk. See IDREF="73355" TYPE="TITLE""Listing All the Windows in Your Desks" for detailsLBL="" HELPID=""ID="65853"The "Restore All" CommandID="ch10106"Choose "Restore All" to open all of the minimized windows in the current desk.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="80974"The "Minimize All" CommandID="ch10107"Choose "Minimize All" to minimize all of the windows in your current desk. When you minimize a window, you turn it into a small square that takes up little screen space. To return the windows to their original size, choose "Restore All."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="48555"The "Add to Global" CommandID="ch10108"Select a window on one of the desks in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Add to Global" command to place the selected window on the global desk. Placing a window on the global desk makes it appear on all desks. See IDREF="49744" TYPE="TITLE""Placing a Window in All Desks" for details.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="51271"The "Remove from Desk" CommandID="ch10109"IDREF="14196" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Windows Between Desks" explains how you can copy a window from one desk to another. To remove the window from one desk, select the window in the Desks Overview display; then choose "Remove from Desk." If you close the window, you make the window disappear from all desks.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="73388"The "Minimize" CommandID="ch10110"Select a window on one of the desks in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Minimize" command to turn the window into a small square that takes up little screen space. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="52973"The "Restore" CommandID="ch10111"Select a minimized window on one of the desks in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Restore" command to open the window again. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="93701"The "Raise" CommandID="ch10112"Select a window on one of the desks in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Raise" command. This pops the window to the top; the entire window is visible.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="53267"The "Lower" CommandID="ch10113"Select a window on one of the desks in the Desks Overview window; then choose the "Lower" command. The window jumps to the bottom of the stack of windows and exposes the windows that were beneath it.LBL="" HELPID="ovcon_listwindow"The List All WindowID="ch10114"The List All window shows you a list of open windows. Double-click an item in the list to move that window onto your current desk."Window Names" and "Icon Names" determine what name appears in the list of open windows. Click "Window Names" to display the name that appears in the title bar of the window; click "Icon Names" to display the name that appears on the window when it is minimized.The list contains all open windows. Use the scroll bars to view portions of the list that are hidden. Click an item in the list to select it; double-click an item to display that window in your current desk.The Selection area displays the name of the item in the selected item in the list. If you know the name of the window you want to open, you can type it here.Press the OK button to copy the selected window to your current desk, and close the List All window.Press the Apply button to copy the selected window to your current desk, and keep the List All window open.Press the Cancel button to close the window without making any changes.NoteThe List All window provides a list of the windows that are open when you choose the "List All..." command. The list does not change if you open and close windows while the List All window is open.LBL="" HELPID="ov_keyshortcuts"Keyboard Shortcuts for Desks Overview CommandsID="ch10115"Most commands in the Desks Overview window have both a keyboard and a mnemonic shortcut. Standard keyboard shortcuts are listed on the right side of the menu; mnemonic shortcuts are indicated by an underlined letter. The following table lists the keyboard and mnemonic shortcuts for the Desks Overview window.COLUMNS="3"LEFT="0" WIDTH="101"CommandLEFT="110" WIDTH="101"Keyboard ShortcutLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"MnemonicLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Hide Menubar/Show 
Menubar"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; mLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Show Global 
Desk/Hide Global 
Desk"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Show 
Snapshots/Hide 
Snapshots"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Display Window 
Name"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; wLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Display Icon Name"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; iLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Display No Names"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Quit"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-qLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-o; qLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""New Desk"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-nLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Copy Selected"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-cLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Rename Selected"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-rLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; rLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Goto Selected"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-oLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Delete Selected"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Scaling"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""6%"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; s; 6LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""7%"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; s; 7LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""8%"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; s; 8LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""9%"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; s; 9LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""10%"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; s; 10LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""User defined"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; uLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Custom"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-d; s; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""List All..."LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-lLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Restore All"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-aLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; rLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Minimize All"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-mLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Add to Global"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-gLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Remove from Desk"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-dLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Minimize"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-sLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; mLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Restore"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-eLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; eLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Raise"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; aLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Lower"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-w; oLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Click for Help"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Shift>-<F1>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-h; cLBL="11-2"Table 11-2 Shortcuts for commands on the Desks Overview window.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="51741"The Launch WindowID="ch10116"The Launch window appears when you press the <
Alt> key while double-clicking an application icon. Use this window to specify a command line option for an application. See IDREF="52986" TYPE="TITLE""Running Applications With Command Line Options" for a step-by-step example.LBL="" HELPID="srch_overview"ID="30386"The Search Tool: An OverviewID="ch10117"The Search tool helps you find icons that you want to use. You can use the Search tool to findicons for files and directoriesicons for printers, tape drives, and disk drives that are connected to your system or another system on the networkicons that represent other systems on your networkicons that represent other system usersThe controls for performing each type of search are stored on a page. By default the Search tool contains six pagesname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'one each for finding files, tape drives, disk drives, printers, users, and other systems on the network. These pages are listed on the Find toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""Anatomy of the Search ToolThis section explains the menus and the results area of the Search tool.LBL="" HELPID="srch_resultsarea"The Results AreaID="ch10118"The lower portion of the Search Catalog window displays icons that meet the search criteria. Double-click to open an icon. If you want easy access to any of these icons, drag them onto the desktop, onto a shelf, or onto a page in the Icon Catalog. Use commands on the Arrange and View menus to change the way these icons are sorted and displayed. Use commands on the Selected menu to manipulate these iconsname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'copy them or print them, for example.LBL="" HELPID="srch_tabarea"The Page Display AreaID="ch10119"The page display area shows a tab for each page in the Search tool. You can click a tab to move from one page to another. Some of the tabs might not fit in the space provided. When this happens, a stack of unnumbered tabs appears at the left or right edge of the tab display area. To turn to a page whose tab is hidden:Place the cursor over the stack of unnumbered tabs; then press the left mouse button. Choose a page number from the menu that appears.LBL="" HELPID="srch_icons"The Display as Icons ButtonID="ch10120"Click this button to display the results of a search as icons. This button is equivalent to the "as Icons" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="srch_list"The Display as List ButtonID="ch10121"The results of a search are displayed as icons by default. Click this button to view the icons as a sorted list. This button is equivalent to the "as List" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="srch_column"The Display in Columns ButtonID="ch10122"Click this button to organize the icons in a window into columns. This button is equivalent to the "as Columns" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="srch_previmg"The Preview Images ButtonID="ch10123"If the search results contain image files, click this button and the file icon will be replaced with a small snapshot of the image. This button is equivalent to the "as Gallery" command on the View menu. LBL="" HELPID="srch_thumbwheel"The ThumbwheelID="ch10124"Use the thumbwheel to change the size of icons in that window. Place the cursor over the thumbwheel; then drag the cursor up to make the icons smaller or down to make the icons larger. To revert to the original size, click the small box below the thumbwheel.LBL="" HELPID="srch_menus"About the Search Tool MenusThis section provides basic information on each menu and its commands. Click an item in the list to get information on a particular menu.IDREF="41275" TYPE="TITLE""The Page Menu on the Search Tool"IDREF="53737" TYPE="TITLE""The Selected Menu on the Search Tool"IDREF="10379" TYPE="TITLE""The Arrange Menu on the Search Tool"IDREF="36089" TYPE="TITLE""The View Menu on the Search Tool"IDREF="28356" TYPE="TITLE""The Match Menu on the Search Tool"LBL="" HELPID="srch_pagemenu"ID="41275"The Page Menu on the Search ToolID="ch10125"The controls for performing a specific type of search are stored on a page. By default the Search tool contains six pagesname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'one each for finding files, tape drives, disk drives, printers, system users, and other systems on the network. You use commands on the Page menu to move from page to page, remove pages, and create and save custom searches. Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="57051" TYPE="TITLE""The "New" Command"IDREF="59804" TYPE="TITLE""The "Rename" Command"IDREF="81091" TYPE="TITLE""The "Remove" Command"IDREF="53949" TYPE="TITLE""The "Page up" Command"IDREF="52744" TYPE="TITLE""The "Page down" Command"IDREF="72914" TYPE="TITLE""The "Quit" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="57051"The "New" CommandID="ch10126"By default, the "New" rollover menu contains six commands: "File Search," "Printer Search," "Person Search," "Host Search," "Tape Drive Search," and "Disk Drive Search." Choose one of these commands when you want to create a custom search and save it on a page in the Search tool. A new page appears. Choose "Rename" to specify a new name for the page.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="59804"The "Rename" CommandID="ch10127"Turn to a page in the Search tool; then choose the "Rename" command to rename a page. A window appears into which you type the new page name. The title bar and tab change to display the new name.The name you choose must be a valid file name. Use only letters, numbers, and underscores. Avoid inserting blank spaces between words or use characters.NoteYou cannot change the name of default pages.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="81091"The "Remove" CommandID="ch10128"Choose the "Remove" command to delete the page you are currently displaying. A notifier appears asking if you are certain that you want to delete the page. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="53949"The "Page up" CommandID="ch10129"Choose the "Page up" command to display the previous set of search controls.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="52744"The "Page down" CommandID="ch10130"Choose the "Page down" command to display the next set of search controls.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="72914"The "Quit" CommandID="ch10131"Choose the "Quit" command when you are finished using the Search tool. The window disappears. LBL="" HELPID="srch_selectedmenu"ID="53737"The Selected Menu on the Search ToolThe lower portion of the Search tool displays the results of a search. Commands on the Selected menu affect the selected icons. You can also access this menu by placing the cursor over the Search window, and then pressing the right mouse button.Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="40185" TYPE="TITLE""The "Open Icon" Command"IDREF="94840" TYPE="TITLE""The "Make Copy" Command"IDREF="92840" TYPE="TITLE""The "Make Linked Copy" Command"IDREF="51065" TYPE="TITLE""The "Remove" Command"IDREF="39938" TYPE="TITLE""The "Print" Command"IDREF="74278" TYPE="TITLE""The "Permissions" Command"IDREF="36072" TYPE="TITLE""The "Get Info" Command"IDREF="93693" TYPE="TITLE""The "Find an Icon" Command"IDREF="42339" TYPE="TITLE""The "Put Away Icon" Command"IDREF="34695" TYPE="TITLE""The "Show Path" Command"IDREF="57656" TYPE="TITLE""The "Hide Path" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="40185"The "Open Icon" CommandID="ch10132"The "Open Icon" command opens a selected icon and displays its contents in a window. If you open a folder icon, you see a window that shows the contents of that directory. If you open a file icon, you can edit or view the file. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="94840"The "Make Copy" CommandID="ch10133"The "Make Copy" command makes a copy of the selected file, folder, or application icon. The copy is named copy_of_filename. It appears on the page, next to the original icon and is actually stored in your home directory. For example, suppose the file is named copy_of_invite. The full pathname for the file is /usr/people/yourname/copy_of_invite.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="92840"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandThe "Make Linked Copy" command makes a linked copy of the selected file, folder, or application icon. A link lets you access an icon from several different places, and give it a unique name in each place. When you make a linked copy, a copy of the icon appears next to the original one. It's named link_to_filename and has an "L" next to the icon. The linked copy appears on the page, next to the original icon, and also appears on the desktop and in your home directory.NoteYou do not need to make a linked copy to access an icon from several different places. You can place an icon on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Book. Doing so gives you another place from which to access the icon. See also IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons" and IDREF="27460" TYPE="TITLE""Making a Linked Copy."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="51065"The "Remove" CommandThe "Remove" command removes the selected icon from a directory and places it in the dumpster directory. Placing a file in the dumpster is the first step in deleting the file from your computer's disk. See IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files."NoteYou can change the behavior of the "Remove" command so that it deletes files rather than moving them into the dumpster. See IDREF="32491" TYPE="TITLE""Disabling the Dumpster."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="39938"The "Print" CommandID="ch10134"The "Print" command sends the contents of the selected icon to your default printer. If you select a folder icon, you print a list of the files in that directory. If you select a file, you print the contents of the file (text or images, for example).See also IDREF="25430" TYPE="TITLE""Printing Files."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="74278"The "Permissions" CommandID="ch10135"The "Permissions" command displays a form that lets you control who can and cannot view or edit a file or directory. For detailed instructions on changing file permissions, see IDREF="90048" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 9, "Sharing and Protecting Work."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="36072"The "Get Info" CommandID="ch10136"The "Get Info" command displays a form that shows detailed information about the selected file, folder, or application icon. The command is gray and inaccessible if you have selected another type of icon.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="93693"The "Find an Icon" CommandID="ch10137"The "Find an Icon" command opens a window into which you can type the name of an icon you want to find. For example, suppose you want to place the IRIS Showcase icon on the shelf for a a particular Directory View window. Choose "Find an Icon"; then type showcase in the type-in field. The icon appears. For further details, see IDREF="96395" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Command."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="42339"The "Put Away Icon" CommandID="ch10138"If you don't want an icon to appear in the Search tool any longer, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon." The icon disappears from the results area but is not deleted.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="34695"The "Show Path" CommandID="ch10139"The "Show Path" command displays the folder in which an icon in the results area is actually located. For example, suppose the IRIS Showcase icon appears in the results area. Select the icon; then choose "Show Path." A folder named sbin appears, and a thin line connects the IRIS Showcase icon to this folder. To hide the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="57656"The "Hide Path" CommandID="ch10140"When you choose "Show Path," a thin line appears between the selected icon and the folder in which it's stored. Choose "Hide Path" and the connecting line disappears. To put away the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Share..." CommandID="ch10141"The "Share..." command appears on the menu when you select a folder icon. Choose this command if you want to let people who are logged in to other systems on the network access the selected directory from their own desktops. The Share window appears. Click the Help button on the window for further instructions.LBL="" HELPID="srch_arrangemenu"ID="10379"The Arrange Menu on the Search ToolThe Arrange menu contains commands that change the way icons are sorted, or arranged, in the window. Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="48703" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Name" Command"IDREF="17676" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Date" Command"IDREF="14031" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Size" Command"IDREF="83349" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Type" Command"IDREF="92132" TYPE="TITLE""The "to Grid" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="48703"The "by Name" CommandID="ch10142"The "by Name" command arranges icons alphabetically: numerals, then capital letters, then lowercase letters.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="17676"The "by Date" CommandID="ch10143"The "by Date" command arranges file icons in the window according to the date on which they were last modified.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="14031"The "by Size" CommandID="ch10144"The "by Size" command arranges file icons in the window according to size (in bytes, from smallest to largest).LBL="" HELPID=""ID="83349"The "by Type" CommandID="ch10145"The "by Type" command arranges file icons by type.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="92132"The "to Grid" CommandID="ch10146"The "to Grid" command snaps the icons to an invisible grid so they are in neat rows and columns.LBL="" HELPID="srch_viewmenu"ID="36089"The View Menu on the Search ToolThe View menu contains commands that change the way icons are placed in the window. Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="97000" TYPE="TITLE""The "as Icons" Command"IDREF="92280" TYPE="TITLE""The "as Columns" Command"IDREF="71167" TYPE="TITLE""The "as List" Command"IDREF="94385" TYPE="TITLE""The "as Gallery" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="97000"The "as Icons" CommandID="ch10147"Choose the "as Icons" command to display the contents of a directory as icons scattered throughout the window. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="92280"The "as Columns" CommandID="ch10148"Choose "as Columns" from the View menu to organize the icons in a window into columns. Only the icon name appears. Choose "as List" to see the size and modification date and time for files.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="71167"The "as List" CommandID="ch10149"By default, the results of a search are presented as a list of icons. The list includesthe icon name. Tape and disk drive icons include the name of the system to which the device is connected. File icons include the full pathname so you know the directory in which the icon is stored.the size of the icon in bytesthe date and time at which the icon was modifiedChoose the "as Icons" command if you have changed the display and want to return to the default.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="94385"The "as Gallery" CommandID="ch10150"Choose "as Gallery" to replace the standard image file icon with a small snapshot of that image. LBL="" HELPID=""The "Show Query" CommandID="ch10151"When you choose "Show Query," the search controls disappear; you see only the results area. To display the search controls, choose "Show Query" again.LBL="" HELPID="srch_matchmenu"ID="28356"The Match Menu on the Search ToolWhen you choose a command from the Match menu, a new set of search controls appears in the window. You use these to narrow your search. For example, instead of finding all available printers, you can specify that you want to find the available color printers. The commands on this menu vary depending on the type of item for which you searchname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'a file, printer, tape drive, disk drive, user, or system.LBL="" HELPID="srch_shortcuts"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Search ToolID="ch10152"Many commands on Search tool menus have both a keyboard and a mnemonic shortcut. Standard keyboard shortcuts are listed on the right side of the menu; mnemonic shortcuts are indicated by an underlined letter. The following table lists the keyboard and mnemonic shortcuts.COLUMNS="3"LEFT="0" WIDTH="101"CommandLEFT="110" WIDTH="101"Keyboard ShortcutLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"MnemonicLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""New"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Rename"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; rLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Remove"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; eLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Page Up"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Page Up>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; uLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Page Down"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Page Down>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Quit"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-qLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; qLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Open Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-oLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; oLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Make Copy"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-cLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Make Linked Copy"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Remove"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; eLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Print"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-pLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; pLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Permissions"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-sLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Get Info"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-iLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; i LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Find an Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-fLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; f LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Put Away Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; a LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Show Path"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s;s LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Hide Path"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; hLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Name"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Date"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Size"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Type"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; tLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""to Grid"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Icons"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; iLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as List"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Columns"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Gallery"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Show Query"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; qLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Click for Help"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Shift>-<F1>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-h; cLBL="11-3"Table 11-3 Shortcuts for commands on the Search tool.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_over"ID="36123"The Icon Catalog: An OverviewID="ch10153"The Icon Catalog shows collections of applications and tools that are available on your system. You canbrowse through the icons to see what applications are availablerun applications by double-clicking their iconsfind icons you want to use; then drag them onto the desktop or onto a shelf so they are easily accessiblecreate your own collection of icons. For example, suppose you use a combination of programs to create and edit movies. You can create a new page; then place icons for these tools onto that page.Each collection is stored on a separate page. If you want to create your own collection of icons, you can add pages to the Icon Catalog.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_tabarea"The Page Display AreaID="ch10154"The page display area shows a tab for each page in the Icon Catalog. You can click a tab to move from one page to another. Some of the tabs might not fit in the space provided. When this happens, a stack of unnumbered tabs appears at the left or right edge of the tab display area. To turn to a page whose tab is hidden:Place the cursor over the stack of unnumbered tabs; then press the left mouse button. Choose a page number from the menu that appears.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_icons"The Display as Icons ButtonID="ch10155"Click this button to display the contents of the Icon Catalog as icons. This button is equivalent to the "as Icons" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_list"The Display as List ButtonID="ch10156"When you open the Icon Catalog, the contents of the window appear as icons. Click this button to view the icons as a sorted list. This button is equivalent to the "as List" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_column"The Display in Columns ButtonID="ch10157"Click this button to organize the icons in a window into columns. This button is equivalent to the "as Columns" command on the View menu.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_previmg"The Preview Images ButtonID="ch10158"If the Icon Catalog contains image files, click this button and the file icon will be replaced with a small snapshot of the image. This button is equivalent to the "as Gallery" command on the View menu. LBL="" HELPID="icbook_thumbwheel"The ThumbwheelID="ch10159"Use the thumbwheel to change the size of icons in that window. Place the cursor over the thumbwheel; then drag the cursor up to make the icons smaller or down to make the icons larger. To revert to the original size, click the small box below the thumbwheel.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_menus"About the Icon Catalog MenusThis section provides basic information on each menu and its commands. Click an item in the list to get information on a particular menu.IDREF="29972" TYPE="TITLE""The Page Menu on the Icon Catalog"IDREF="46179" TYPE="TITLE""The Selected Menu on the Icon Catalog"IDREF="97502" TYPE="TITLE""The Arrange Menu on the Icon Catalog"IDREF="58547" TYPE="TITLE""The View Menu on the Icon Catalog"LBL="" HELPID="icbook_pagemenu"ID="29972"The Page Menu on the Icon CatalogEach page in the Icon Catalog contains a collection of icons. You use commands on the Page menu to move from page to page and to create and remove pages. Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="86587" TYPE="TITLE""The "New Page" Command"IDREF="91822" TYPE="TITLE""The "Rename" Command"IDREF="25574" TYPE="TITLE""The "Remove" Command"IDREF="35243" TYPE="TITLE""The "Page up" Command"IDREF="23647" TYPE="TITLE""The "Page down" Command"IDREF="87441" TYPE="TITLE""The "Quit" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="86587"The "New Page" CommandID="ch10160"The "New Page" command adds a new, empty page to the Icon Catalog. By default, the page is named "unnamed1." Use the "Rename" command to specify a different name.The new page is listed on the Find toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="91822"The "Rename" CommandID="ch10161"Turn to a page in the Icon Catalog; then choose the "Rename" command to rename a page in the Icon Catalog. A window appears into which you type the new page name. The title bar and tab change to display the new name and this name appears on the Find toolchest.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="25574"The "Remove" CommandID="ch10162"Choose the "Remove" command to delete the page you are currently displaying. A notifier appears asking if you are certain that you want to delete the page. You cannot remove the default pages. Turn to a default page, choose the "Remove" command, and you make any icons that you added to the page disappear.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="35243"The "Page up" CommandID="ch10163"Choose the "Page up" command to display the previous page in the Icon Catalog.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="23647"The "Page down" CommandID="ch10164"Choose the "Page down" command to display the next page in the Icon Catalog.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="87441"The "Quit" CommandID="ch10165"Choose the "Quit" command when you are finished using the Icon Catalog. The window disappears. LBL="" HELPID="icbook_selectedmenu"ID="46179"The Selected Menu on the Icon CatalogCommands on the Selected menu affect the icons in the catalog that are selected. You can also access this menu by placing the cursor over background of the Icon Catalog, then pressing the right mouse button.Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="73086" TYPE="TITLE""The "Open Icon" Command"IDREF="98091" TYPE="TITLE""The "Make Copy" Command"IDREF="99915" TYPE="TITLE""The "Make Linked Copy" Command"IDREF="55549" TYPE="TITLE""The "Remove" Command"IDREF="27327" TYPE="TITLE""The "Print" Command"IDREF="86333" TYPE="TITLE""The "Get Info" Command"IDREF="47727" TYPE="TITLE""The "Permissions" Command"IDREF="10945" TYPE="TITLE""The "Find an Icon" Command"IDREF="97707" TYPE="TITLE""The "Put Away Icon" Command"IDREF="68120" TYPE="TITLE""The "Hide Path" Command"IDREF="50193" TYPE="TITLE""The "Show Path" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="73086"The "Open Icon" CommandID="ch10166"The "Open Icon" command opens a selected icon and displays its contents in a window. If you open a folder icon, you see a Directory View window that shows the contents of that directory. If you open a file icon, you can edit or view the file.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="98091"The "Make Copy" CommandID="ch10167"The "Make Copy" command makes a copy of the selected file, folder, or application icon. The copy is named copy_of_filename. It appears on the page, next to the original icon, and is actually stored in your home directory. For example, suppose the file is named copy_of_invite. The full pathname for the file is /usr/people/yourname/copy_of_invite.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="99915"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandID="ch10168"The "Make Linked Copy" command makes a linked copy of the selected file, folder, or application icon. A link lets you access an icon from several different places, and give it a unique name in each place. When you make a linked copy, a copy of the icon appears next to the original one. It's named link_to_filename and has an "L" next to the icon. The linked copy appears on the page, next to the original icon, and also appears on the desktop and in your home directory.NoteYou do not need to make a linked copy to access an icon from several different places. You can place an icon on the desktop, on a shelf, or on a page in the Icon Catalog. Doing so gives you another place from which to access the icon. See also IDREF="27460" TYPE="TITLE""Making a Linked Copy" and IDREF="57754" TYPE="TITLE""Giving Yourself Easy Access to Icons."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="55549"The "Remove" CommandID="ch10169"The "Remove" command removes the selected icon and places it in the dumpster directory. Placing a file in the dumpster is the first step to deleting the file from your computer's disk. See IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files."NoteYou can change the behavior of the "Remove" command so that it deletes files rather than moving them into the dumpster. See IDREF="32491" TYPE="TITLE""Disabling the Dumpster."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="27327"The "Print" CommandID="ch10170"The "Print" command sends the contents of the selected icon to your default printer. If you select a folder icon, you print a list of the files in that directory. If you select a file, you print the contents of the file (text or images, for example).LBL="" HELPID=""ID="47727"The "Permissions" CommandID="ch10171"The "Permissions" command displays a form that lets you control who can and cannot view or edit a file or directory. For detailed instructions on changing file permissions, see IDREF="90048" TYPE="TITLE"Chapter 9, "Sharing and Protecting Work."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="86333"The "Get Info" CommandID="ch10172"The "Get Info" command displays a form that shows detailed information about the selected file, folder, or application icon. The command is gray and inaccessible if you have selected another type of icon.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="10945"The "Find an Icon" CommandID="ch10173"The "Find an Icon" command opens a window into which you can type the name of an icon you want to find. For example, suppose you want to place the IRIS Showcase icon on the shelf for a a particular Directory View window. Choose "Find an Icon"; then type showcase in the type-in field. The icon appears. For further details, see IDREF="96395" TYPE="TITLE""Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Command."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="97707"The "Put Away Icon" CommandID="ch10174"If you don't want an icon to appear in the Icon Catalog any longer, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon." The icon disappears from the page but the file is not deleted from the directory in which it is stored. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="50193"The "Show Path" CommandID="ch10175"The "Show Path" command displays the folder in which that icon is actually located. For example, suppose the IRIS Showcase icon appears on a page in the Icon Catalog. Select the icon; then choose "Show Path." A folder named sbin appears, and a thin line connects the IRIS Showcase icon to this folder. To hide the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""ID="68120"The "Hide Path" CommandID="ch10176"When you choose "Show Path," a thin line appears between the selected icon and the folder in which it's stored. Choose "Hide Path" and the connecting line disappears. To put away the folder icon, select the icon; then choose "Put Away Icon."LBL="" HELPID=""The "Share..." CommandID="ch10177"The "Share..." command appears on the menu when you select a folder icon. Choose this command if you want to let people who are logged in to other systems on the network access the selected directory from their own desktops. The Share window appears. Click the Help button on the window for further instructions.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_arrangemenu"ID="97502"The Arrange Menu on the Icon CatalogThe Arrange menu contains commands that change the way icons are sorted, or arranged, in the window. Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="44646" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Name" Command"IDREF="78104" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Date" Command"IDREF="22465" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Size" Command"IDREF="23650" TYPE="TITLE""The "by Type" Command"IDREF="93796" TYPE="TITLE""The "to Grid" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="44646"The "by Name" CommandID="ch10178"The "by Name" command arranges icons alphabetically; numerals, then capital letters, then lowercase letters.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="78104"The "by Date" CommandID="ch10179"The "by Date" command arranges file icons in the window according to the date on which they were last modified.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="22465"The "by Size" CommandID="ch10180"The "by Size" command arranges file icons in the window according to size (in bytes, from smallest to largest).LBL="" HELPID=""ID="23650"The "by Type" CommandID="ch10181"The "by Type" command arranges icons by type.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="93796"The "to Grid" CommandID="ch10182"The "to Grid" command snaps the icons to an invisible grid so they are in neat rows and columns.LBL="" HELPID="icbook_viewmenu"ID="58547"The View Menu on the Icon CatalogThe View menu contains commands that change the way icons are placed in the window. Choose a command name from the list below for more details:IDREF="26553" TYPE="TITLE""The "as Icons" Command"IDREF="52697" TYPE="TITLE""The "as Columns" Command"IDREF="99163" TYPE="TITLE""The "as List" Command"IDREF="69422" TYPE="TITLE""The "as Gallery" Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="26553"The "as Icons" CommandID="ch10183"Choose the "as Icons" command to display the contents of a directory as icons. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="52697"The "as Columns" CommandID="ch10184"Choose "as Columns" from the View menu to organize the icons in a window into columns. Only the icon name appears. Choose "as List" to see the size and modification date and time.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="99163"The "as List" CommandID="ch10185"When you open a folder icon, the contents of the directory appear as icons. Choose "as List" to view the contents as a sorted list. The list includesthe icon name. Tape and disk drive icons include the name of the system to which the device is connected. File icons include the full pathname so you know the directory in which the icon is stored.the size of the icon in bytesthe date and time at which the icon was modifiedChoose the "as Icons" command if you have changed the display and want to return to the default.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="69422"The "as Gallery" CommandID="ch10186"Choose "as Gallery" to replace the standard image file icon with a small snapshot of that image. LBL="" HELPID="icbook_shortcuts"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Icon CatalogID="ch10187"Many commands on Icon Catalog menus have both a keyboard and a mnemonic shortcut. Standard keyboard shortcuts are listed on the right side of the menu; mnemonic shortcuts are indicated by an underlined letter. The following table lists the keyboard and mnemonic shortcuts.COLUMNS="3"LEFT="0" WIDTH="101"CommandLEFT="110" WIDTH="101"Keyboard ShortcutLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"MnemonicLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""New Page"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-nLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Rename"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-rLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; rLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Remove"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; eLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Page Up"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Page Up>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; uLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Page Down"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Page Down>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Quit"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-qLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-p; qLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Open Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-oLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; oLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Make Copy"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-cLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Make Linked Copy"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Remove"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; eLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Print"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-pLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; pLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Permissions"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-sLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Get Info"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-iLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; i LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Find an Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Ctrl>-fLEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; f LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Put Away Icon"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; a LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Show Path"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s;s LEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Hide Path"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-s; hLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Name"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; nLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Date"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; dLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Size"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; sLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""by Type"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; tLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""to Grid"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-a; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Icons"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; iLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as List"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; lLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Columns"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; cLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""as Gallery"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-v; gLEFT="0" WIDTH="101""Click for Help"LEFT="110" WIDTH="101"<Shift>-<F1>LEFT="220" WIDTH="101"<Alt>-h; cLBL="11-4"Table 11-4 Shortcuts for commands on the Icon Catalog.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77457"Anatomy of the Color Scheme Browser WindowLBL="" HELPID="sch_click_list"The Schemes ListThe schemes list contains a list of schemes available on your system. You can choose a scheme you like and apply it to your desktop. You can also edit colors in a scheme and save these changes to the current scheme or to a scheme you create.LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_sample"The Sample ImagesEvery item in a window is assigned a color. The Color Scheme Browser contains several sample images that display a scheme's assigned colors for each of these items. These sample images include:"Basic Colors" displays a scheme's colors for the most frequently used items in a window, including buttons, scroll bars, and text input areas."Additional Colors" displays a scheme's colors for any additional items in a window, including scrolled list items, accent colors, and errors."Window Manager Colors" displays a scheme's colors for window borders."Graphics Colors" displays fixed colors that applications assign to specific items when they want a color to have a consistent and recognizable meaning. These colors do not change color as schemes change. They merely darken or lighten in color, depending on the scheme.LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_palette"The Color PaletteThe Color Palette contains a colored square for each color used in the displayed scheme. To find the assignment of a color, choose "Quick Help" from the Help menu, then move your cursor on top of a colored square to see the assignment. Click on a colored square to edit or change a color.LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_shade"The Shade WheelMove the shade wheel back and forth to lighten or darken the colors in a scheme. Click the button to the right of the shade wheel to return to the default shade.LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_menus"The Color Scheme Browser MenusThe Color Scheme Browser contains the following menus:IDREF="28759" TYPE="TITLE""The Application Menu"IDREF="49279" TYPE="TITLE""The Sample Image Menu"IDREF="62317" TYPE="TITLE""The Help Menu"LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_app"ID="28759"The Application MenuThe application menu contains the following commands:IDREF="89428" TYPE="TITLE""The Save As Command"IDREF="55490" TYPE="TITLE""The Remove Local Schemes Command"IDREF="39486" TYPE="TITLE""The Remove Selected Scheme Command"IDREF="32035" TYPE="TITLE""The Edit Mode Command"IDREF="13690" TYPE="TITLE""The Quit Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="89428"The Save As CommandUse the "Save As" command when you want to save edits to a new scheme file rather than to the original scheme.  When you save the file to the new name, the new scheme name appears in the schemes list.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="55490"The Remove Local Schemes CommandUse the "Remove Local Schemes" command to delete all edits made to schemes and return all schemes to their default colors. When you remove local schemes, names of schemes that contained edits change back from italic to the default font. Removing local schemes removes edits made to schemes on your account only.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="39486"The Remove Selected Scheme CommandUse the "Remove Selected Scheme" command when you want to remove local edits made to a selected scheme or when you want to remove a scheme you created.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="32035"The Edit Mode CommandChoose "Edit Mode" when you want to change colors in a chosen scheme. Click on a color in the Color Palette to open the Scheme Editor Color Browser and change the color. Use "Quick Help" to find color assignments for colors in the scheme.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="13690"The Quit CommandChoose "Quit" when you finish using the Color Scheme Browser. The window closes.LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_sample"ID="49279"The Sample Image MenuThe sample images menu contains the following:IDREF="76205" TYPE="TITLE""The Basic Colors Command"IDREF="74999" TYPE="TITLE""The Additional Colors Command"IDREF="77812" TYPE="TITLE""The Window Manager Colors Command"IDREF="93023" TYPE="TITLE""The Graphics Colors Command"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="76205"The Basic Colors Command"Basic Colors" displays a scheme's colors for the most frequently used items in a window, including buttons, scroll bars, and text input areas.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="74999"The Additional Colors Command"Additional Colors" displays a scheme's colors for any additional items in a window, including scrolled list items, accent colors, and errors.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="77812"The Window Manager Colors Command"Window Manager Colors" displays a scheme's colors for window borders.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="93023"The Graphics Colors Command"Graphics Colors" displays fixed colors that applications assign to specific items when they want a color to have a consistent and recognizable meaning. These colors do not change color as schemes change. They merely darken or lighten in color, depending on the scheme.LBL="" HELPID="sch_click_help"ID="62317"The Help MenuThe Help menu provides help on the Color Scheme Browser. Use "Click for Help" when you want information on an item in the Color Scheme Browser window. Choose "Click for Help." The cursor changes into a question mark. Move the question mark on top of an item, then click on the item for information.Use "Quick Help" when you want to know the assignments of colors in a chosen scheme. Choose "Quick Help," then move your cursor over items in the sample scheme display and the Color Palette. The assignment for each color appears next to the cursor and at the bottom of the Color Scheme Browser window.Use the other menu items for information on how to use the Color Scheme Browser.LBL="" HELPID="makedotdesktop"Understanding the makeDotDesktop WindowID="ch10188"The makeDotDesktop window appears under the following circumstances:You have login accounts on several systems. You have mounted your home directory so that you use the same home directory on all systems.You are logging in to one of the systems for the first time.The makeDotDesktop window lets you choose whether you want your desktop to be the same as or different from the desktop on the other systems. This is controlled via a session file. The file determines which desks are available and which windows are open when you log in to the system. You have the following choices:If you want a different desktop on that system, click the box next to "Create a new desktop environment." Your working environment is unique to that system.If you want to use another system's session file as a starting point, select a system from the list at the top of the window; then click the box next to "Copy the desktop environment from the selected machine."If you want the desktop on all systems to be the same, every time you log in to any of the system, select a system from the list at the top of the window; then click the box next to "Share (i.e. link) the desktop environment with the selected machine."LBL="" HELPID="outputd_help"About the Error Message WindowBy default, many applications display error messages in dialog boxes. On occasion, an application displays error message in the console window. You can change this behavior so that hidden error messages are displayed in this pop-up window. To disable the output window, open the Desktop Settings control panel, then click Display Application Errors. The window is disabled when the checkmark disappears.LBL="A"ID="64659"Using IRIX CommandsThe Indigo Magic User Environment allows you to work with the IRIX operating system by pointing at and clicking on icons. You can also use the traditional interface to IRIX name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' the shell.This Appendix explains how to start and stop IRIX shells and teaches you how to use some basic IRIX commands. It contains these sections:IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"IDREF="39910" TYPE="TITLE""Using IRIX Commands: A Few Basics"IDREF="21109" TYPE="TITLE""A Quick Reference to IRIX Commands"IDREF="30918" TYPE="TITLE""A Quick Reference to IRIX Shortcuts"IDREF="43311" TYPE="TITLE""Determining Your Current Working Directory"IDREF="62428" TYPE="TITLE""Moving to a Different Directory Using the cd Command"IDREF="93424" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Contents of a Directory Using the ls Command"IDREF="33620" TYPE="TITLE""Creating Directories Using the mkdir Command"IDREF="33885" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Contents of a Directory Using the dirview Command"IDREF="49548" TYPE="TITLE""Copying a File or Directory Using the cp Command"IDREF="44613" TYPE="TITLE""Accessing an Icon from Several Different Directories Using the ln Command"IDREF="70225" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming and Moving Files Using the mv Command"IDREF="17857" TYPE="TITLE""Deleting Files Using the rm Command"IDREF="72600" TYPE="TITLE""Deleting Directories Using the rm and rmdir Commands"IDREF="18382" TYPE="TITLE""Printing Using IRIX Commands"IDREF="20760" TYPE="TITLE""Setting Permissions Using the chmod Command"IDREF="50855" TYPE="TITLE""Getting Reference Information on IRIX Commands"LBL="" HELPID=""ID="74409"Opening a Shell Window The shell is the traditional interface to UNIX workstations. It is a window in which you type IRIX commands, and it is identical in structure to other windows. You can start additional shells by following these steps:Choose "Unix Shell" from the Desktop toolchest.A red outline of a window appears. Move the mouse until the outline is positioned where you want it; then click the left mouse button.The shell window appears. Its fixtures look like those on other windows, but inside the body is a prompt (often a # or % sign) and a square cursor. See IDREF="71765" TYPE="GRAPHIC"Figure A-1
.FILE="shell.bw" POSITION="INLINE" SCALE="FALSE"LBL="A-1"Figure A-1 
ID="71765"A shell window.Move the cursor inside the window.Notice that the title bar highlights and the small green rectangle becomes solid. This indicates that the window is active; you can begin typing commands.You close a shell window just as you close any other window. See IDREF="68151" TYPE="TITLE""Closing Windows"
 for instructions.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="39910"Using IRIX Commands: A Few BasicsThis section provides information on pathnames and background processes.LBL="" HELPID=""Understanding PathnamesThere are two types of pathnames: absolute pathnames and relative pathnames. An absolute pathname provides complete directions to a location in the IRIX file system, starting from the topmost directory. /usr/people/joe/reports and /usr/people/joe/Budgets/budget92 are examples of absolute pathnames.A relative pathname is based on the directory in which you are currently working. For example, if you are in /usr/people/joe and want to open a file named reports, you type: jot reports. If you want to open a file in a subdirectory called Budgets, you type: jot Budgets/filenameLBL="" HELPID=""Using Background ProcessesWhen you use IRIX commands to run an application, you can end the command line with the ampersand sign (&). This runs the application in the background so you can type other commands in the shell window and minimize the shell without quitting from the application.Certain commands probably should not be run as background processes name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' the vi text editor for example. vi lets you create or edit a text file within the shell window. If you type vi &, vi runs the but the text never appears in the shell window; you can't read or edit the text.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="21109"A Quick Reference to IRIX Commands IDREF="35994" TYPE="TABLE"Table A-1 lists the IRIX commands discussed in this chapter and provides a quick summary and example for each.COLUMNS="3"LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"CommandLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"UseLEFT="185" WIDTH="356"ExampleLEFT="0" WIDTH="67"pwdLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To determine your 
current working 
directory.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"pwdThis displays the name of the 
directory in which you're 
working. LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"cdLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To change (move) to a 
different directory.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"cd /usr/tmpThis moves you to the /usr/tmp 
directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"lsLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To list the contents of a 
directory.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"ls /usr/tmpThis lists the contents of the 
/usr/tmp directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"dirviewLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To open a Directory 
View window that 
displays the contents of 
a directory.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"dirview /usr/tmpThis opens a Directory View 
window for the /usr/tmp 
directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"mkdirLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To create new 
directories.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"mkdir reportsThis creates a reports directory 
in your current working 
directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"cpLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To copy a file or 
directory.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"cp oldfile oldfile.copyThis creates a copy of oldfile and 
names it oldfile.copy.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"lnLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To create a linked copy 
of a file. This lets you 
access one file from 
several different 
places.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"ln images movies/imagesThis lets you access the file 
images from a directory called 
movies.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"mvLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To move and rename 
files and directories.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"mv oldfilename 
newfilenameThis renames oldfilename.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"rmLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To delete files.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"rm oldfileThis deletes oldfile.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"rm -rLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To delete all the files in 
a directory before 
deleting the directory 
itself.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"rm -r 
/usr/people/joe/reportsThis deletes all of the files in the 
reports directory; then deletes 
the reports directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"rmdirLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To delete empty 
directories.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"rmdir 
/usr/people/joe/reportsThis deletes the reports 
directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"lpLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To print files.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"lp imagesThis prints the file images.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"lpstatLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To check the print 
queue.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"lpstat -sThis provides a summary of 
your print requests.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"chmodLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To change permission 
settings for a file.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"chmod go-wx imagesThis takes away write and 
execute permissions for Group 
and Other.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"manLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"To open the man page 
for an IRIX command.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"man lpThis opens the man page for the 
lp command.LEFT="0" WIDTH="67"man -tLEFT="75" WIDTH="101"This lets you print the 
specified man page.LEFT="185" WIDTH="356"man -t lpThis prints the man page for lp 
on your default printer.LBL="A-1"Table A-1 
ID="35994"Summary of IRIX commands.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="30918"A Quick Reference to IRIX ShortcutsCertain special characters act as shortcuts.IDREF="68063" TYPE="TABLE"Table A-2
 contains a list of these characters and an explanation of their use.COLUMNS="3"LEFT="0" WIDTH="54"CharacterLEFT="60" WIDTH="108"UseLEFT="175" WIDTH="356"ExampleLEFT="0" WIDTH="54"* 
(wildcard) LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"A substitute for any 
number of characters.LEFT="175" WIDTH="356"ls *.docThis lists all files in the current 
directory ending in .doc.LEFT="0" WIDTH="54"?LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"A substitute for one 
character.LEFT="175" WIDTH="356"ls ch?.docThis lists all files in the current 
directory that begin with ch 
followed by one other character, 
and end with .doc. For example, 
ch1.doc, ch2.doc, and so on.LEFT="0" WIDTH="54".LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"An abbreviation for the 
current working 
directoryLEFT="175" WIDTH="356"dirview .This opens a Directory View 
window for your current 
directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="54"..LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"An abbreviation for the 
parent directoryLEFT="175" WIDTH="356"cd ..This moves you up one directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="54"~LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"An abbreviation for your 
home directoryLEFT="175" WIDTH="356"cd ~/reportsThis moves you to the reports 
directory in your home directory.LEFT="0" WIDTH="54"!!LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"A command to repeat 
the last command you 
typed.LEFT="175" WIDTH="356"LEFT="0" WIDTH="54"^LEFT="60" WIDTH="108"A symbol for replacing 
characters.LEFT="175" WIDTH="356"cp ch1.doc /usr/tmp
^1^2This reissues the command using 
ch2.doc.LBL="A-2"Table A-2 
ID="68063"IRIX shortcuts.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="43311"Determining Your Current Working DirectoryThe title bar of a Directory View windows lists the name of the directory whose contents it displays. When you are typing commands in a shell window, you use the pwd command to find out the name of the directory in which you are located. pwd stands for print working directory, or loosely translated, "Where am I?"Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.At the prompt, type:pwdThen press 
<Enter>.The IRIS responds with a pathname. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="62428"Moving to a Different Directory Using the cd Commandcd is the IRIX command for changing from one directory to another. To use it:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type cd, followed by the name of the directory to which you want to switch. For example, to switch to a directory named /usr/tmp, type:cd /usr/tmpThen press 
<Enter>.Two periods (..) is an abbreviation for the name of the parent directory. In other words, it says to go up one directory. Suppose you are working in /usr/people/joe/Reports and want to move to /usr/people/joe/Images. You can type:cd ../Imagescd alone takes you to your home directory.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="93424"Viewing the Contents of a Directory Using the ls Commandls is the IRIX command for opening and displaying the contents of a directory. To use the ls command:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Use the cd command to move to the directory whose contents you want to view. For example, type:cd /usr/people/<loginname>Then press 
<Enter>.Type:lsThen press 
<Enter>.The contents of your home directory appear as a list.IRIX can give you a more informative listing when you use an option with the ls command. The a option lists all of the files, even those that begin with a period (.)The F option with ls:puts an asterisk (*) next to all programsputs a trailing slash (/) after all directoriesdoes not add any characters to plain text filesLBL="" HELPID=""ID="33885"Viewing the Contents of a Directory Using the dirview Commanddirview is the IRIX command to open a Directory View window. Directory View windows display the contents of a directory graphically. To use the dirview command:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type dirview, followed by the name of the directory whose contents you want to display in a Directory View window. For example, to open a Directory View window for /usr/sbin, type:dirview /usr/sbinTo open a Directory View window for the directory you are currently working in, type: dirview .A period (.) is an abbreviation for the name of your current working directory. LBL="" HELPID=""ID="33620"Creating Directories Using the mkdir Commandmkdir is the IRIX command for making a new directory. This example shows how to make a new directory called sub in your home directory.Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Use the cd command to move to the directory in which you want to create a new directory. For example, type:cd /usr/people/<loginname>Then press 
<Enter>.Type:mkdir subThen press 
<Enter>.This command creates a directory called sub in your home directory.See IDREF="90910" TYPE="TITLE""Creating a Directory"
 to learn how to create new directories using the graphical interface.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="49548"Copying a File or Directory Using the cp Commandcp is the IRIX command for copying files and directories. This example shows how to to copy a file called oldfile.Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:cp oldfile oldfile.copyThen press 
<Enter>.This command means "copy oldfile from my current working directory into a file named oldfile.copy in my current working directory." To place the copy in a different directory, add a pathname before the new file name.See IDREF="27742" TYPE="TITLE""Copying Icons"
 to learn how to copy files using the graphical interface.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="44613"Accessing an Icon from Several Different Directories Using the ln Commandln is the IRIX command for creating linked copies. A linked copy lets you create different names for one file. Suppose you have a file named images in /usr/people/joe. You work in /usr/people/joe/movies quite frequently and want to easily access the images file.Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Use the cd command to move to the /usr/people/joe directory. Type:cd /usr/people/joeThen type:ln -s images movies/imagesNote
You could also give the file a different name.See IDREF="27460" TYPE="TITLE""Making a Linked Copy"
 to learn how to make linked copies using the "Make Linked Copy" command.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="70225"Renaming and Moving Files Using the mv Commandmv is the IRIX command for renaming and moving files and directories. To rename a file using the mv command:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:mv oldfilename newfilenameoldfilename is now named newfilename.Note
Do not use blank spaces when renaming files using IRIX commands. IRIX does not replace blank spaces with underscores, so you'll have problems accessing the file later.To move oldfile from /usr/people/joe to /usr/tmp:Place the cursor in the shell window.Type:mv oldfilename /usr/tmp/oldfilenameSee IDREF="44753" TYPE="TITLE""Renaming Files and Directories"
 to learn how to rename files using the graphical interface; see IDREF="34177" TYPE="TITLE""Moving Icons"
 to learn how to move files using the graphical interface.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="17857"Deleting Files Using the rm Commandrm is the IRIX command for deleting files. You type rm followed by the name of the file you want to delete. For example, to delete a file named oldfile:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:rm oldfileThis deletes the file named oldfile in your current working directory.See IDREF="27933" TYPE="TITLE""Removing Files"
 to learn how to delete files using the "Remove" command.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="72600"Deleting Directories Using the rm and rmdir Commandsrmdir is the IRIX command for deleting an empty directory; an option to the rm command lets you delete a directory and all of the files it contains.To delete an empty directory:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Use the cd command to move to the directory that contains the empty directory you want to delete. For example, if you want to delete a directory named oldfiles in /usr/people/joe, type:cd /usr/people/joeThen press 
<Enter>.Type:rmdir oldfilesThen press 
<Enter>.The oldfiles directory is deleted.To delete a directory and all of the files it contains:Use the cd command to move to the directory that contains the directory you want to delete. For example, if you want to delete a directory named oldfiles in /usr/people/joe, type:cd /usr/people/joeThen press 
<Enter>.Type:rm -r oldfilesThen press 
<Enter>.This deletes all of the files in the directory then deletes the oldfiles directory itself.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="18382"Printing Using IRIX CommandsYou can easily print from your IRIS workstation using the graphical tools and menu commands. This section describes an alternative name='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]' printing using the lp command and checking the status of a print request using the lpstat command. LBL="" HELPID=""Printing Using the lp Commandlp is the IRIX command for printing a file. You type lp followed by the name of the file you want to print. The file prints on your default printer. For example, to print a file named images:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:lp imagesThen press 
<Enter>.To print to a printer other than the default, you can use the -d option to lp. For example, to print images to a printer named printer2, you would type:lp -dprinter2 imagesSee the Personal System Administration Guide for instructions on installing the printer. See the lp man page for a list of all the available options and capabilities.LBL="" HELPID=""Checking the Print Queue Using the lpstat Commandlpstat is the IRIX command for displaying the list of print requests that have been sent to a printer. The -s option provides a summary of your print requests.Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:lpstat -sThen press 
<Enter>.See IDREF="60632" TYPE="TITLE""Viewing the Queue of Print Jobs"
 to learn how to use the Print Manager to check the status of your print requests. See the lpstat man page for a list of all the available options and capabilities.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="20760"Setting Permissions Using the chmod Commandchmod is the IRIX command you use to change permission settings for a file. You can specify Read (r), Write (w), and Execute (x) permissions for the file's owner (u), the group (g), and others (o). You type chmod followed by the permission setting information followed by the file name whose settings you are changing. The permission setting information has several parts. You specify:who is affected by the change (u, g, o)whether you are adding or taking away permissionsand which permissions are affected (r, w, x)For example, suppose you have a file named images that everyone can read, write, and execute. You decide you want to prevent all others from writing and executing the file. Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:chmod go-wx imagesThen press 
<Enter>.See IDREF="29064" TYPE="TITLE""Understanding Permissions"
 and IDREF="69264" TYPE="TITLE""Changing Permissions"
 for instructions on using a menu command and form to change permission settings.LBL="" HELPID=""ID="50855"Getting Reference Information on IRIX CommandsBy default, your IRIS workstation contains online man pages that have information on all IRIX commands. For example, to access a man page for the ls command:Place the cursor in the shell window.To open a shell window, choose 
"Shell" from the 
Tools toolchest. See IDREF="74409" TYPE="TITLE""Opening a Shell Window"
 for step-by-step instructions.Type:man lsThen press 
<Enter>.After a few moments the man page is displayed.Note
The -t option lets you print a man page. For example, to print the man page for the lp command, you type: man -t lpGlossary4DwmThe name of the default Window Manager. See also Window Manager.accountSee login account.active windowThe only window that recognizes input (activity) from the keyboard and mouse; only one window is active at a time. Make a window active by placing the cursor within its boundaries.AdministratorThe person who can use the most privileged account, root. This person must have a personal login account for daily use. When there are serious system problems to correct, the person logs in to the root account to change system information using the graphical tools or using the IRIX shell. The Administrator has all the capabilities of a Privileged User, plus the capability to change information in the root account (such as the password) and to log in to an IRIX shell as root. Because there is only one root account, there is only one Administrator per system. The Information Panel for a particular system includes the name of the system's Administrator so other users know whom to contact for help.ASCII text  An ASCII file contains text only. When you save a file as ASCII text, you save only the characters, not the size, the font, the style, the color, or the format. autologinThe autologin user who is automatically logged in to the system each time it is powered up.back upTo copy a certain set of files and directories from your hard disk to a tape or other storage media.backup tapeA tape that contains a copy of a set of files and directories that are on your hard disk. A full backup tape contains a copy of all files and directories, including IRIX, that are on your hard disk.baud rateThe speed (calculated as bits per second) at which the system sends information to a serial device, such as a modem or a terminal.borderless windowA window with no title bar or borders.business cardWhen you double-click a person's icon in the desktop, you see a business card that displays public information about the person. The information on the business card is drawn from the person's User Information window in the Users and Groups tool.business card informationBusiness card information appears in the top portion of a person's User Information window in the Users and Groups tool; it includes a picture of the person and contact information about the person. Usually this information is the same for every account that belongs to a particular person.buttonOn a mouse, a button is a switch that you press with a finger. In a window on your screen, a button is a labeled rectangle that you click using the cursor and mouse.CD-ROM disk (CD)A flat metallic disk that contains information that you can view and copy onto your own hard disk; you cannot change or add to its information. CD-ROM is short for compact-disk: read-only memory.centralized networkA network where a central server controls services and information; the server is maintained by one or more individuals called network administrators. On a centralized network that uses NIS, this server is called the NIS master, and all other systems on the network are called NIS clients. See also network administrator, NIS, NIS client, NIS domain, and NIS master.chooseTo press the left mouse button to bring up a menu, move the cursor to highlight the command that you want to run, then release the button.clickTo hold the mouse still, then press and immediately release a mouse button.command line optionOptions that let you specify how you want to run an IRIX command. See the reference page (man page) for a command for a list of the available command line options.configuration file A system file that you change to customize the way your system behaves. Such files are sometimes referred to as customization files.confidence testA test that you run to make sure a particular device (such as the keyboard, mouse, or a drive) is set up and working properly.consoleThe window that appears as a stowed icon each time you log in; IRIX reports status and error messages to this window.CPUThe CPU (Central Processing Unit) is the chip that proccesses data. Depending on the type and version of a CPU, the system will run at different speeds.current working directoryThe directory within the file system in which you are currently located when you are working in a shell window.cursorThe small red arrow on the screen that echoes the movements of the mouse. It changes shape depending on its location on the screen.daisy-chainA series of SCSI devices that are connected to each other, with one device connected to the SCSI port on a system and the final device terminated.DATA magnetic tape from which you can read and to which you can copy audio and digital information. default printerThe printer to which the system directs a print request if you do not specify a printer when you make the request. You set the default printer using the Print Manager.defaultsA set of behaviors that Silicon Graphics specifies on every system. You can later change these specifications, which range from how your screen looks to what type of drive you want to use to install new software. For example, when you run IRIS Showcase, the Master gizmo opens by default You can change the default settings using the Preferences gizmo.deskThe collection of windows and icons that appears on your computer screen. You can create multiple desks and switch between them. When you switch from one desk to another, the screen changes, almost as if you had several different monitors.desktopThe screen background. By default, several icons are placed on the desktop: a folder icon representing your home directory, a dumpster icon, several application icons, and an icon for each peripheral you have installed. You can place other icons on the desktop so that you can access them more easily. In this way, the desktop is similar to an actual office desk. For example, on your desk, you might have a telephone, a container of pens and pencils, and a stack of folders or notebooks related to the projects on which you're currently working, Other items that are used less are stashed away in desk drawers. Directory View windowThe window you see when you open a folder (directory) icon. It displays the files, folders, and applications that the directory contains.disk directoryA directory that represents an entire disk or a partition of a disk. When you open a disk directory, you view the contents of the disk.disk useThe percentage of space on your disk that contains information.distributed networkA network where there is no automated central control of services or information. Each system's administrator must work with the network administrator to keep each system's network information up to date.domainA group of hosts on a network whose hostnames have the same suffix. See also NIS domain.domain nameThe common suffix found in all hostnames that are in the same domain on a network. See also NIS domain.double-clickTo hold the mouse still, then press and release it twice, very rapidly. When you double-click an icon it opens into a window; when you double-click the Window menu button, the window closes.dragTo press and hold down a mouse button, then move the mouse.driveA hardware device that lets you access information on various forms of media, such as hard, floppy, and CD-ROM disks, and magnetic tapes.drop pocketA drop pocket is the small blue square into which you can drop icons. You can drag a folder icon and place it into the drop pocket on a Directory View window. The window displays the contents of that folder.You can also drag a file or application icon and place it in the drop pocket on a Directory View window. The window displays the contents of the directory in which that icon is stored. As a final example, you can drag an IRIS Showcase icon and drop it into a drop pocket on the Search tool to specify the type of files you want to findname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'in this case, IRIS Showcase files.dumpsterA temporary holding place for icons that you remove using the "Remove" command. To retrieve files from the dumpster, double-click the dumpster icon; to empty the dumpster, choose "Empty Dumpster" from the Desktop toolchest.electronic mail addressYour login name plus location information so you can receive electronic mail. The address is usually assigned by the network administrator.fieldAn area in a window in which you can type text.fileA container in which you store information such as text, programs, or images you create using an application.file hierarchySee file system.file systemA hierarchy of directories and files. Directories contain other directories and files; files cannot contain directories. The root (/) directory is at the top of the hierarchy.formA window that contains buttons that you must click and/or editable fields that you must fill in.global deskThe desk to place windows on if you want them to automatically appear on all of your desks.groupA collection of login names. Members of a group can make file permissions apply to all other members of a group. You create and modify groups using the Users and Groups tool.home directoryA directory in which you create and store your work. Usually, the home directory is named /usr/people/<loginname>, where loginname is the name of your login account. A folder icon for your home directory appears on the desktop by default.hostAny system connected to the network.hostnameThe name that uniquely identifies each host (system) on the network. iconA small picture that represents a stowed or closed file, directory, application, or IRIX process.icon finderThe area of a window that contains the drop pocket, the pathname field, the path bar, and the recycle button. You use these fixtures to move from one directory to another.input focus Only one window at a time recognizes mouse movement and typing. The window that does is said to have the input focus.instThe software tool that you use to install system software, software options, and maintenance releases that come from Silicon Graphics.IP addressThe number that uniquely identifies each system on the network.IRISAny graphics workstation manufactured by Silicon Graphics, Inc.IRIXThe Silicon Graphics version of the UNIX operating system. See also system software.IRIX processesTasks that IRIX carries out to keep the system running correctly or to complete an explicit command. Each process has a unique process ID number.Kb (Kilobyte)A standard unit for measuring the information storage capacity of disks and memory (RAM and ROM); 1000 bytes make one kilobyte.launch iconAn arrow-shaped icon that appears in the right margin of the IRIS InSight viewer and the Help viewer. Double-click this icon to run an application.linked copyA pointer to a file or directory that exists in a different location in the file system. When you make a linked copy of a file, you are not creating another instance of the file; you are creating another location from which you can access the original file.local workstation, drive, disk, file system, or printerThe physical workstation whose keyboard and mouse you are using, all hardware that is connected to that workstation, and all software that resides on that hardware or its removable media.log inTo give the system your login name so you can start a session on the IRIS workstation.log outTo end a session on the IRIS.login accountA collection of information about a person who can log in to the system. The information includes the person's full name, login name, contact information, and the name of a home directory in which the person can store directories and files.login nameThe name you use to identify yourself to the system. You type it to log in to the system, and the system uses it to label files that belong to you. If your system is on a network, the network administrator usually must approve of the name to make sure it is unique.login screenThe window that you see after powering on the system, before you can access files and directories. The window contains one icon for each login account on the system.Mb (Megabyte)A standard unit for measuring the information storage capacity of disks and memory (RAM and ROM); 1000 kilobytes make one megabyte.menuA list of operations or commands that the IRIS can carry out on various objects on the screen. menu buttonA button that reveals a pop-up menu. Place the cursor over the button; then press the left mouse button.mount pointThe directory on your workstation from which you access information that is stored on a local or remote disk resource.mountTo make a file system that is stored on a local or remote disk resource accessible from a specific directory on your workstation.mouseA hardware device that you use to communicate with windows and icons. You move the mouse to move the cursor on the screen, and you press its buttons to initiate operations. An optical mouse must always be on the mouse pad for the IRIS to interpret its movements; a mechanical mouse works on any clean, flat surface. mouse padFor an optical mouse, this is the rectangular, metallic surface that reads the movements of the mouse. For a mechanical mouse, this is a clean, soft rectangular surface that makes the mouse's trackball roll efficiently. multi-tasking systemA system that can run several processes (such as running applications, printing files, and updating files) simultaneously.multiuser systemA system that several users can work on simultaneously and maintain private files.networkA group of computers and other devices (such as printers) that can all communicate with each other electronically to transfer and share information.Network Access accountA person who has a Network Access account on a system can log in to the system only when the network and the optional NIS software are running properly. The information in a Network Access account is entered by the network administrator on the NIS master system. Privileged Users on other systems on the network cannot change any business card information about a Network Access account.network administratorThe network administrator is the person who maintains a network of systems. If the network runs the optional NIS software, the network administrator maintains the master database of login account information.NFSA networking software option. It lets you access files and directories that reside on the disks of other workstations as if they resided on a local disk in your own workstation. NFS stands for Network File System.NISA networking software option that lets you control network information and services from a central server called the NIS master. NIS stands for Network Information Service. See also centralized network, NIS client, NIS domain, and NIS master.NIS clientAny system on a centralized network that runs NIS other than the NIS master. The NIS client receives services and information from the NIS master.NIS domain nameThe unique name of a network (or sub-network) that runs NIS. All hostnames in the NIS domain have the NIS domain name as their suffix.NIS masterThe server that stores the complete database of information about all the hosts (systems) and users on a centralized NIS network. The NIS master periodically updates host information on all other systems on the network (NIS clients); its user information is always available to every host. The network administrator is responsible for setting up, maintaining, and troubleshooting the NIS master.notifierA form that appears when the system requires you to confirm an operation that you just requested, or when an error occurs.openTo double-click an icon, or to select an icon, then choose "Open" from a menu in order to display a window that contains the information that the icon represents.ownerThe user who created a particular file or directory and can specify which other users of the system can access the file.parent directoryA relative term that refers to a directory that contains another directory. If directory A contains directory B, then A is the parent directory of B.passwordA combination of letters and/or numbers that only you know; it is an optional element of your login account. If you specify a password for your account, you must type it after you type your login name before the system lets you access files and directories.pathA list of directories the system searches when trying to find a file or run a program. You can add directories to and delete directories from your path. For instructions, see "Adding Directories to Your Path."pathnameThe list of directories that leads you from the root (/) directory to a specific file or directory in the file system.peripheralA hardware device that adds more functionality to the basic workstation, such as a tape drive. See also external devices and internal drives.permissionsThe information attached to each directory and file that specifies which users can access it and to what degree.permissions maskA system setting that specifies the default permissions that the system assigns to newly created files and directories. The owners of those files and directories can later change the permissions.primary systemThe system that you use most frequently. You enter the name of this system in your User Information window, and it appears on your buainess card.Primary UserFor environments in which one person uses a particular system much more frequently than anyone else (where the person is essentially the system's owner), you can designate that person as the Primary User. The Primary User does not necessarily have any special access privileges; the person's name appears along with the Administrator's name in the system's Information Panel so other users know uses the system regularly. There is only one Primary User per system.Printer ManagerA tool that you use to set up printer software and monitor jobs that you send to the printer. You access it through either the System toolchest or the System Manager, where it is called the Printer tool.Privileged UserA person whose standard login account includes administrative privileges. When a Privileged User logs in, he can change his personal work area, and can use the graphical administration tools to change or customize the entire system (for example, add a disk, create a login account, or install system software). There can be more than one Privileged User on the same system.popWindows on the screen can overlap each other. You can pop a window so it appears on top of other windows.portAn outlet to which you attach cable connectors.power cableThe cable that connects the workstation to a grounded electrical outlet.power downTo turn off the power switches on the workstation chassis and the monitor.power upTo turn on the power switches on the workstation chassis and the monitor.PROM monitorThe interface that you use to communicate with the system after it is powered up, but before it is booted up and running IRIX.promptA character or word that the system displays in an IRIX shell that indicates that the system is ready to accept commands. The default prompt for regular user accounts is %; the default prompt for the root account is #.push Windows on the screen can overlap each other. You can push a window so it hides behind other windows.queueA list of print jobs waiting to be printed on a particular printer.quitTo stop running an application.remote workstation, drive, disk, file system, or printerA hardware device or the information or media it contains that you can access across the network; they are not physically connected to your workstation.reset buttonA physical button on the workstation that you press to cut off, then immediately restore power to the workstation. You should never press this button while IRIX is running, unless all attempts to shut down the system using software fail. See also shut down.restore (files)To copy files that once resided on your hard disk from another disk or a tape back onto your hard disk.root accountThe standard IRIX login account reserved for use by the system administrator. This account's home directory is the  (/) directory of the filesystem; the user of the root account has full access to the entire filesystem (that is, can change and delete any file or directory). The user of this account is sometimes referred to as the superuser.root (/) directoryThe directory at the top of the file system hierarchy.SCSI addressA number that uniquely identifies a SCSI device to a system. No two SCSI devices that are physically connected to the same workstation can have the same SCSI address.SCSI cableA cable that connects a SCSI device to a SCSI port on a workstation.SCSI deviceA hardware device that uses the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) protocol to communicate with the system. Hard disk, floppy disk, CD-ROM, and tape drives are all SCSI devices.selectTo position the cursor over an icon then click the (left) mouse button. Once an icon is selected, it is the object of whatever operation you select from a menu.serial deviceAny hardware device that requires a serial cable connection to communicate with the workstation.serial portAn outlet on the workstation to which you connect external serial devices.serverA system that other systems on the network access to use its disk space, software, or services.shelfThe shelf is a place for you to put icons that you need to use frequently while working in a particular directory. For example, if the directory contains many files, you might want to place the files you use most frequently on the shelf. Or, if the directory contains many color Showcase slides, you might want to place the icon for a color printer onto the shelf.shellA window into which you type IRIX commands.shell scriptA program that issues and interprets a sequence of IRIX commands.shuffleTo change the order in which windows are stacked on the screen.Standalone Access accountAn account that you can log in to whether or not the system is connected to the network or NIS is running. The account information is stored on the local system rather than on the NIS master system.shut downTo safely close all files, log out, and bring the workstation to a state where you can safely power it down. You choose "System Shutdown" from the System toolchest menu to do this.software optionAny software product that you buy from Silicon Graphics, other than the standard system software that comes on your system disk.superuserAn alternate name for the user of the root login account. See also system administrator.systemAll the hardware and software that makes up the computer.system account informationSystem account information appears in the bottom portion of a person's User Information window in the Users and Groups tool. It includes information about the type of account the person has on this system, whether the person is a Privileged User or the Primary User of the system, and which area of the system is reserved for the person (the home directory). Often this information is different on every system on which a person has an account. system diskThe physical disk that contains the standard IRIX operating system softwarename='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'the software that makes your workstation run.system softwareThe standard IRIX operating system software and Silicon Graphics tools that come on the system disk and on the tape or CD-ROM that you use in the event of a system crash.TCP/IPThe standard networking software that's included in the system software.UNIXA multiuser, multi-tasking operating system from AT&T upon which the Silicon Graphics IRIX operating system is based.UserAny person who has a standard login account on the system. When a User logs in, he can change only his personal work area. A User can run the graphical administration tools, but the features of the tools that change system information are not available.unmountTo make a file system that is accessible from a specific directory on your system unavailable.user IDA number that uniquely identifies a user to the system.wildcardA character, usually an asterisk (*), that you use alone to specify all files and directories that are available, or with a few other letters to specify a group of files and directories that have a common element in their names. For example, to specify all files and directories that begin with the letters "ch," you would type: ch*windowA portion of the screen that you can manipulate that contains text or graphics.window managerThe system program that draws and controls windows. It lets you create and manipulate windowsname='mdash' font=symbol charset=fontspecific code=190 
			descr='[mdash]'move them, resize them, and close them."Open Remote Directory" commandIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another System"Show Snapshots/Hide Snapshots" CommandIDREF="ch1092"The "Show Snapshots/Hide Snapshots" Command"Add to Global" commandIDREF="ch10108"The "Add to Global" CommandIDREF="ch68"Placing a Window in All Desks"An Icon" commandIDREF="ch1037"The "An Icon" Command"Arrange" command"by Date"IDREF="ch1075"The "by Date" Command"by Name"IDREF="ch1074"The "by Name" Command"by Size"IDREF="ch1076"The "by Size" Command"by Type"IDREF="ch1077"The "by Type" Command"to Grid"IDREF="ch1078"The "to Grid" Command"as Columns" commandIDREF="ch1080"The "as Columns" CommandIDREF="ch10184"The "as Columns" CommandIDREF="ch10148"The "as Columns" Command"as Gallery" commandIDREF="ch10150"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch10186"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch1082"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch531"Previewing Image File Icons in a Directory View Window"as Icons" commandIDREF="ch10183"The "as Icons" CommandIDREF="ch10147"The "as Icons" CommandIDREF="ch1079"The "as Icons" Command"as List" commandIDREF="ch10149"The "as List" CommandIDREF="ch10185"The "as List" CommandIDREF="ch1081"The "as List" Command"Audio Control" commandIDREF="ch1017"The "Audio Control" Command"by Date" commandIDREF="ch10143"The "by Date" CommandIDREF="ch10179"The "by Date" Command"by Name" commandIDREF="ch10178"The "by Name" CommandIDREF="ch10142"The "by Name" Command"by Size" commandIDREF="ch10144"The "by Size" CommandIDREF="ch10180"The "by Size" Command"by Type" commandIDREF="ch10145"The "by Type" CommandIDREF="ch10181"The "by Type" Command"Copy Selected" commandIDREF="ch1099"The "Copy Selected" Command"Customize" commandIDREF="ch1016"The "Customize" Command"Desks Overview" commandIDREF="ch1013"The "Desks Overview" Command"Desktop Help" commandIDREF="ch1040"The "Desktop Help" Command"Display Icon Name" commandIDREF="ch1094"The "Display Icon Name" Command"Display No Names" commandIDREF="ch1095"The "Display No Names" Command"Display Window Name" commandIDREF="ch1093"The "Display Window Name" Command"Empty Dumpster" commandIDREF="ch1034"The "Empty Dumpster" CommandIDREF="ch1018"The "Empty Dumpster" CommandIDREF="ch418"Removing FilesIDREF="ch1072"The "Empty Dumpster" Command"File Permissions" commandIDREF="ch1028"The "File Permissions" Command"Find an Icon" commandIDREF="ch10137"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10173"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch51"Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1068"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1030"The "Find an Icon" Command"Get Info" commandIDREF="ch10136"The "Get Info" CommandIDREF="ch10172"The "Get Info" CommandIDREF="ch1067"The "Get Info" CommandIDREF="ch1029"The "Get Info" Command"Goto Selected" commandIDREF="ch10101"The "Goto Selected" Command"Hidden Files" commandIDREF="ch1084"The "Hidden Files" Command"Hide Global Desk/Show Global Desk" commandIDREF="ch1091"The "Hide Global Desk/Show Global Desk Command"Hide Menubar/Show Menubar" commandIDREF="ch1090"The "Hide Menubar/Show Menubar" Command"Hide Path" commandIDREF="ch1071"The "Hide Path" CommandIDREF="ch10176"The "Hide Path" CommandIDREF="ch10140"The "Hide Path" CommandIDREF="ch1033"The "Hide Path" Command"Home Directory" commandIDREF="ch1014"The "Home Directory" Command"Legal Notice" commandIDREF="ch1044"The "Legal Notice" Command"List All..." commandIDREF="ch10105"The "List All..." CommandIDREF="ch65"Listing All the Windows in Your Desks"Log Out" commandIDREF="ch29" Logging OutIDREF="ch1020"The "Log Out" Command"Lower" commandIDREF="ch10113"The "Lower" Command"Make Copy" commandIDREF="ch1061"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch10133"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch415"Copying IconsIDREF="ch10167"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1023"The "Make Copy" Command"Make Linked Copy" commandIDREF="ch1062"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1024"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch10168"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch416"Making a Linked Copy"Man Pages" CommandIDREF="ch1042"The "Man Pages" Command"Minimize All" commandIDREF="ch10107"The "Minimize All" Command"Minimize" commandIDREF="ch10110"The "Minimize" Command"New Desk" commandIDREF="ch1098"The "New Desk" Command"New Directory" commandIDREF="ch1027"The "New Directory" CommandIDREF="ch47"Creating a DirectoryIDREF="ch1065"The "New Directory" Command"New Page" commandIDREF="ch10160"The "New Page" Command"New" commandIDREF="ch10126"The "New" Command"Online Books" commandIDREF="ch1041"The "Online Books" Command"Open Icon" commandIDREF="ch34"Running Applications Using the "Open Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10132"The "Open Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10166"The "Open Icon" CommandIDREF="ch42"Opening a Directory Using the "Open Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1022"The "Open Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1060"The "Open Icon" Command"Overview" menuIDREF="ch1089"The Overview Menu"Page Down" commandIDREF="ch10164"The "Page down" CommandIDREF="ch10130"The "Page down" Command"Page Up" commandIDREF="ch10129"The "Page up" CommandIDREF="ch10163"The "Page up" Command"Permissions" commandIDREF="ch1066"The "Permissions" CommandIDREF="ch10171"The "Permissions" CommandIDREF="ch10135"The "Permissions" Command"Print" commandIDREF="ch1064"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch4B11"Printing Using the Desktop "Print" CommandIDREF="ch10170"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch1026"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch10134"The "Print" Command"Put Away" commandIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an IconIDREF="ch10138"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1069"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10174"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1031"The "Put Away Icon" Command"Quit" commandIDREF="ch10165"The "Quit" Command"Quit" command, Desks Overview windowIDREF="ch1096"The "Quit" Command"Quit' commandIDREF="ch10131"The "Quit" Command"Raise" commandIDREF="ch10112"The "Raise" Command"Release Notes" commandIDREF="ch1043"The "Release Notes" Command"Remote Directory" commandIDREF="ch37"Using the "Remote Directory" Command to Run Applications on Another SystemIDREF="ch1015"The "Remote Directory" Command"Remove from Desk" commandIDREF="ch10109"The "Remove from Desk" Command"Remove" commandIDREF="ch10128"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch10162"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch10169"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch418"Removing FilesIDREF="ch1063"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1025"The "Remove" Command"Rename Selected" commandIDREF="ch10100"The "Rename Selected" Command"Rename" commandIDREF="ch10161"The "Rename" CommandIDREF="ch10127"The "Rename" Command"Restore All" commandIDREF="ch10106"The "Restore All" Command"Restore" commandIDREF="ch10111"The "Restore" Command"Scaling" commandIDREF="ch10103"The "Scaling" Command"Share..." commandIDREF="ch10177"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch1035"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch1073"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch10141"The "Share..." Command"Shelf" commandIDREF="ch1083"The "Shelf" Command"Show Path" commandIDREF="ch1032"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch10175"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch10139"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch1070"The "Show Path" Command"Show Query" commandIDREF="ch10151"The "Show Query" Command"System Shutdown" commandIDREF="ch210" Turning Off Your Workstation"to Grid" commandIDREF="ch10146"The "to Grid" CommandIDREF="ch10182"The "to Grid" Command"Unix Shell" commandIDREF="ch1019"The "Unix Shell" Commandaccess privilegesIDREF="ch81"Owner, Group, and Others: A Definitiondefault settingsIDREF="ch924"Changing Default Permission SettingsdefinedIDREF="ch82"Permissions Settings: A Definitionactivating screen saversIDREF="ch95"Changing the Screen Saver Activation Delayadditional fontsIDREF="ch4B6"About Impressarioappearance of moving windowsIDREF="ch913"Changing the Appearance of a Moving Windowapplicationsavailable on remote systemsIDREF="ch36"Accessing Applications on Remote SystemsIDREF="ch37"Using the "Remote Directory" Command to Run Applications on Another Systemfinding availableIDREF="ch32"Finding Available ApplicationsinstallingIDREF="ch31"Installing Applicationsoverview of availableIDREF="ch15"Using Available SoftwareremovingIDREF="ch39"Removing Applications runningIDREF="ch33"Running Applicationsrunning automaticallyIDREF="ch915"Saving Your Desktop Layoutspecifying command line options forIDREF="ch35"Running Applications With Command Line Optionsarranging iconsIDREF="ch530"Arranging Icons into ColumnsIDREF="ch1075"The "by Date" CommandIDREF="ch1047"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch1076"The "by Size" CommandIDREF="ch527"Sorting IconsIDREF="ch10142"The "by Name" CommandIDREF="ch1077"The "by Type" CommandIDREF="ch10178"The "by Name" CommandIDREF="ch10179"The "by Date" CommandIDREF="ch10180"The "by Size" CommandIDREF="ch10181"The "by Type" CommandIDREF="ch10182"The "to Grid" CommandIDREF="ch10184"The "as Columns" CommandIDREF="ch10143"The "by Date" CommandIDREF="ch10185"The "as List" CommandIDREF="ch10156"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch10121"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch10157"The Display in Columns ButtonIDREF="ch10144"The "by Size" CommandIDREF="ch1048"The Display in Columns ButtonIDREF="ch10145"The "by Type" CommandIDREF="ch10122"The Display in Columns ButtonIDREF="ch10146"The "to Grid" CommandIDREF="ch1078"The "to Grid" CommandIDREF="ch10148"The "as Columns" CommandIDREF="ch529"Viewing Icons as a ListIDREF="ch10149"The "as List" CommandIDREF="ch1080"The "as Columns" CommandIDREF="ch1074"The "by Name" CommandIDREF="ch1081"The "as List" Commandarranging windowsIDREF="ch71" Organizing Windows Into DesksASCII files, printingIDREF="ch4B18"Changing Printer Settings for ASCII Text FilesIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format Filtersaudio feedbackIDREF="ch919"Turning Off Desktop Soundsaudio, volume ofIDREF="ch14"Adjusting the VolumeIDREF="ch1017"The "Audio Control" Commandautomountand remote searchesIDREF="ch517"Troubleshooting Remote SearchesBack Up and Restore toolIDREF="ch821"Making a Backupbackgroundchanging pattern forIDREF="ch91"Changing the Desktop Backgroundmaking solidIDREF="ch92"Choosing a Solid Color for Your Desktop Backgroundbackground. See desktop.IDREF="ch520"Placing Frequently Used Icons on the Desktopbacking up filesIDREF="ch820"Making a Backupborderless windowsIDREF="ch75"Moving a Borderless Windowborders on windowsIDREF="ch106"The Bordercancelling print requestsIDREF="ch4B3"About PrintStatuschangingbackground patternIDREF="ch91"Changing the Desktop Backgrounddefault permission settingsIDREF="ch924"Changing Default Permission Settingsdesks movingbetween desksIDREF="ch62"Switching Between DeskslanguagesIDREF="ch916"Changing the Language and Keyboard Layoutlocation of iconsIDREF="ch412"Moving Iconslocation of windowsIDREF="ch74"Moving a Window With a Title Barsize of windowsIDREF="ch72"Resizing Windows toolchest contentsIDREF="ch928"Modifying the Toolchestsclick speedIDREF="ch98"Adjusting the Mouse Click Speedclosing windowsIDREF="ch77" Closing Windowscolumns, arranging icons inIDREF="ch530"Arranging Icons into Columnscommand line optionsIDREF="ch35"Running Applications With Command Line OptionsIDREF="ch10116"The Launch Windowconsole windowIDREF="ch11"The Console control panelsIDREF="ch1016"The "Customize" CommandcopyingdesksIDREF="ch1099"The "Copy Selected" Commandfiles for a backupIDREF="ch820"Making a Backupfiles to other systemsIDREF="ch811"Using the rcp Command to Transfer Files and Directoriesfiles to tapeIDREF="ch815"Copying Files to a TapeiconsIDREF="ch1061"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch10133"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch415"Copying IconsIDREF="ch10167"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1023"The "Make Copy" CommandwindowsIDREF="ch64"Copying Windows Between Deskscopyright informationIDREF="ch1044"The "Legal Notice" Commandcpio tape formatIDREF="ch815"Copying Files to a Tapecreatingdesks"New Desk" commandIDREF="ch61"Creating a Deskcursor speedIDREF="ch96"Customizing Mouse Settingscustomizingaccess to shared directoriesIDREF="ch89"Sharing a Directory With Customized Access Permissionsbackground patternIDREF="ch91"Changing the Desktop Backgroundmouse and cursor speedIDREF="ch96"Customizing Mouse Settingsprint jobsIDREF="ch4B4"About PrintPanelIDREF="ch4B12"Customizing Print JobsSearch toolIDREF="ch10126"The "New" CommandIDREF="ch515"Creating and Saving a Custom Searchdefault permission settingsIDREF="ch924"Changing Default Permission Settingsdefault printerIDREF="ch4B22"Designating a Default Printerdefault text editorIDREF="ch923"Choosing a Default EditorDelete Selected" commandIDREF="ch10102"The "Delete Selected" CommanddeletingapplicationsIDREF="ch39"Removing Applications desksIDREF="ch67"Deleting a DeskIDREF="ch10102"The "Delete Selected" CommandfilesIDREF="ch418"Removing Filesdeleting filesIDREF="ch920"Disabling the DumpsterDesk menuIDREF="ch1097"The Desk MenudesksIDREF="ch10101"The "Goto Selected" CommandIDREF="ch1086"The Desks Overview Window: An Overviewand the Desks Overview commandIDREF="ch1013"The "Desks Overview" Commandarranging windows intoIDREF="ch71" Organizing Windows Into Deskschanging display ofIDREF="ch614"Viewing Desks as Snapshots or Buttonscopying desksIDREF="ch1099"The "Copy Selected" Commandcopying windows onIDREF="ch64"Copying Windows Between Deskscreating newIDREF="ch1098"The "New Desk" CommandIDREF="ch61"Creating a DeskdeletingIDREF="ch67"Deleting a DeskIDREF="ch10102"The "Delete Selected" Commanddisplayed in Desks Overview windowIDREF="ch1087"The Desk Display Areaglobal deskIDREF="ch10108"The "Add to Global" CommandIDREF="ch1091"The "Hide Global Desk/Show Global Desk CommandIDREF="ch1088"The Global Deskmoving windows betweenIDREF="ch63"Moving Windows Between DesksrearrangingIDREF="ch611"Changing the Order of Desksremoving desksIDREF="ch67"Deleting a DeskIDREF="ch10102"The "Delete Selected" Commandremoving windows from a deskIDREF="ch10109"The "Remove from Desk" Commandremoving windows from global deskIDREF="ch69"Removing a Window From the Global DeskrenamingIDREF="ch10100"The "Rename Selected" CommandIDREF="ch66"Renaming a Deskresizing display ofIDREF="ch10103"The "Scaling" CommandIDREF="ch615"Resizing Snapshots or Buttonsswitching betweenIDREF="ch62"Switching Between Desksthe global deskIDREF="ch68"Placing a Window in All DesksDesks Overview windowIDREF="ch1086"The Desks Overview Window: An Overview"Overview" menu onIDREF="ch1089"The Overview Menuand window namesIDREF="ch612"Displaying the Names of Windows in a Deskdesk display areaIDREF="ch1092"The "Show Snapshots/Hide Snapshots" CommandIDREF="ch1087"The Desk Display AreaDesk menu onIDREF="ch1097"The Desk Menudisplaying the menubarIDREF="ch1090"The "Hide Menubar/Show Menubar" Commandhiding the menubarIDREF="ch1090"The "Hide Menubar/Show Menubar" Commandkeyboard shortcuts forIDREF="ch10115"Keyboard Shortcuts for Desks Overview CommandsquittingIDREF="ch1096"The "Quit" Commandrearranging desks inIDREF="ch611"Changing the Order of DesksresizingIDREF="ch615"Resizing Snapshots or ButtonsIDREF="ch613"Hints for Resizing the WindowWindow menu onIDREF="ch10104"The Window Menudesktopchanging the backgroundIDREF="ch91"Changing the Desktop BackgrounddefinedIDREF="ch520"Placing Frequently Used Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch12"The Desktopdisabling icons onIDREF="ch925"Disabling Icons on the Desktopicons appearing automaticallyIDREF="ch918"Displaying New Home Directory File Icons on the Desktopmaking solidIDREF="ch92"Choosing a Solid Color for Your Desktop Backgroundplacing icons onIDREF="ch520"Placing Frequently Used Icons on the Desktopprinter icons onIDREF="ch4B7"Placing Available Printers on Your Desktopputting away icons onIDREF="ch1031"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10174"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1069"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10138"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an Iconremoving icons fromIDREF="ch10138"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1069"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10174"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1031"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an Iconsaving layout ofIDREF="ch915"Saving Your Desktop Layoutsize of icons onIDREF="ch917"Changing the Default Size of Icons on the Desktopsounds associated withIDREF="ch919"Turning Off Desktop Soundsdesktop helpIDREF="ch1040"The "Desktop Help" CommandDesktop Settings Control PaneIDREF="ch922"Displaying Application ErrorsDesktop Settings Control PanelIDREF="ch921"Turning File Overwrite Messages On and OffIDREF="ch919"Turning Off Desktop SoundsIDREF="ch918"Displaying New Home Directory File Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch925"Disabling Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch920"Disabling the DumpsterIDREF="ch923"Choosing a Default EditorIDREF="ch917"Changing the Default Size of Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch924"Changing Default Permission SettingsDesktop toolchestIDREF="ch1012"The Desktop Toolchestdirectoriescopying to other systemsIDREF="ch813"Copying a Directory Using the rcp Commandcreating newIDREF="ch1065"The "New Directory" CommandIDREF="ch1027"The "New Directory" CommandIDREF="ch47"Creating a Directorydetermining ownership ofIDREF="ch83"Determining Who Owns a File or DirectoryfindingIDREF="ch59"Finding Directorieshierarchical view ofIDREF="ch10175"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch10139"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch1070"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch1032"The "Show Path" Commandhome directoryIDREF="ch1014"The "Home Directory" Commandin your search pathIDREF="ch926"Adding Directories to Your Pathmaking privateIDREF="ch85"Making a Private Directorymoving icons betweenIDREF="ch412"Moving Iconson other systemsIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another SystemIDREF="ch1015"The "Remote Directory" CommandopeningIDREF="ch41"Opening a Directory: Basic InstructionsrenamingIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and Directoriessharing with other usersIDREF="ch87"Overview of Sharing a DirectoryIDREF="ch10177"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch86"Sharing DirectoriesIDREF="ch1035"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch88"Sharing a Directory So Others Can View and Change Its ContentsIDREF="ch1073"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch10141"The "Share..." CommandDirectory View windowscopying files betweenIDREF="ch810"Copying Files From One System to Another Using Directory View WindowsDisplay as Icons buttonIDREF="ch10120"The Display as Icons ButtonIDREF="ch1046"The Display as Icons ButtonIDREF="ch10155"The Display as Icons ButtonDisplay in Columns buttonIDREF="ch1048"The Display in Columns ButtonIDREF="ch10122"The Display in Columns ButtonIDREF="ch10157"The Display in Columns ButtonDisplay Shelf ButtonIDREF="ch1050"The Display Shelf Buttonkeyboard shortcuts forIDREF="ch1085"Keyboard Shortcuts for Directory View WindowsList ButtonIDREF="ch10121"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch1047"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch10156"The Display as List Buttonon another systemIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another Systemon other systemsIDREF="ch37"Using the "Remote Directory" Command to Run Applications on Another SystemopeningIDREF="ch41"Opening a Directory: Basic InstructionsPreview Images buttonIDREF="ch10123"The Preview Images ButtonIDREF="ch10158"The Preview Images ButtonIDREF="ch1049"The Preview Images ButtonSelected menu onIDREF="ch1059"The Selected Menu on a Directory View WindowshelfIDREF="ch1083"The "Shelf" CommandIDREF="ch1057"The Shelfthumbwheel onIDREF="ch1051"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10159"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10124"The Thumbwheeltoolbar onIDREF="ch1045"The Toolbardisabling the desktopIDREF="ch925"Disabling Icons on the Desktopdisk drives, icons forIDREF="ch513"Finding a Disk Drivediskscopying from floppyIDREF="ch819"Copying Files From a Floppy Diskcopying to floppyIDREF="ch818"Copying Files Onto a Floppy Diskdot (.) filesIDREF="ch532"Viewing Hidden FilesIDREF="ch1084"The "Hidden Files" Commanddouble-click speedIDREF="ch98"Adjusting the Mouse Click Speeddragging and dropping iconsIDREF="ch108"The Drop PocketIDREF="ch1052"The Drop Pocketdrives, icons forIDREF="ch513"Finding a Disk DriveIDREF="ch512"Finding a Tape Drivedrop pocketIDREF="ch108"The Drop PocketIDREF="ch1052"The Drop PocketIDREF="ch43"Placing an Icon Into the Drop PocketdumpsterIDREF="ch920"Disabling the DumpsterIDREF="ch1072"The "Empty Dumpster" CommandIDREF="ch1034"The "Empty Dumpster" CommandIDREF="ch1018"The "Empty Dumpster" Commandfiles inIDREF="ch418"Removing Filesediting textIDREF="ch923"Choosing a Default Editorenlarging windows IDREF="ch105"The Maximize Buttonerror messagesand the console windowIDREF="ch11"The Console file overwrite messageIDREF="ch921"Turning File Overwrite Messages On and Offprinting errorsIDREF="ch4B23"Troubleshooting Printingstatus panel forIDREF="ch922"Displaying Application Errorsfilescopying files from floppyIDREF="ch819"Copying Files From a Floppy Diskcopying files from tapeIDREF="ch816"Retrieving Files From a Tapecopying files to floppy diskIDREF="ch818"Copying Files Onto a Floppy Diskcopying files to tapeIDREF="ch815"Copying Files to a Tapedetermining ownership ofIDREF="ch83"Determining Who Owns a File or DirectoryfindingIDREF="ch54"Finding Files: An OverviewIDREF="ch51"Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch55"Finding Files: Basic InstructionsIDREF="ch1068"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1030"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1037"The "An Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10137"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10173"The "Find an Icon" Commandfinding certain typesIDREF="ch57"Finding Files of a Particular Typemaking privateIDREF="ch84"Preventing Other Users From Viewing a File You OwnmovingIDREF="ch412"Moving IconsnamingIDREF="ch410"Naming Icons: A Few GuidelinesIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and Directorieson another systemIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another Systemon remote systemsIDREF="ch58"Finding Files on Another SystemopeningIDREF="ch48" Opening FilesprintingIDREF="ch10134"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch10170"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch1064"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch4B9"Printing FilesIDREF="ch1026"The "Print" CommandprotectingIDREF="ch84"Preventing Other Users From Viewing a File You Ownreading from tapeIDREF="ch816"Retrieving Files From a TaperemovingIDREF="ch920"Disabling the DumpsterIDREF="ch1025"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch418"Removing FilesIDREF="ch10169"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1063"The "Remove" CommandrenamingIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and DirectoriessavingIDREF="ch49"Saving Filesviewing hiddenIDREF="ch532"Viewing Hidden FilesFind toolchestIDREF="ch1036"The Find Toolchestfindingapplication iconsIDREF="ch32"Finding Available ApplicationsdirectoriesIDREF="ch59"Finding Directoriesdisk drive iconsIDREF="ch513"Finding a Disk DrivefilesIDREF="ch54"Finding Files: An OverviewIDREF="ch55"Finding Files: Basic InstructionsIDREF="ch51"Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" Commandlarge filesIDREF="ch56"Finding Large Filessystems on the networkIDREF="ch514"Finding Another System on the Networktape drive iconsIDREF="ch512"Finding a Tape Drivetroubleshooting remote searchesIDREF="ch517"Troubleshooting Remote Searchestypes of filesIDREF="ch57"Finding Files of a Particular Typefloppy diskscopying files fromIDREF="ch819"Copying Files From a Floppy Diskcopying files toIDREF="ch818"Copying Files Onto a Floppy Diskfolders. See directories.IDREF="ch85"Making a Private Directoryfonts, additionalIDREF="ch4B6"About Impressarioglobal deskIDREF="ch10108"The "Add to Global" CommandIDREF="ch1091"The "Hide Global Desk/Show Global Desk CommandIDREF="ch68"Placing a Window in All DesksIDREF="ch1088"The Global Deskremoving windows fromIDREF="ch69"Removing a Window From the Global DeskgroupIDREF="ch81"Owner, Group, and Others: A DefinitionHelp toolchestIDREF="ch1039"The Help Toolchesthidden filesIDREF="ch532"Viewing Hidden Fileshierarchical view of directoriesIDREF="ch1070"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch10175"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch1032"The "Show Path" CommandIDREF="ch10139"The "Show Path" Commandhome directoryand desktop iconsIDREF="ch918"Displaying New Home Directory File Icons on the Desktophorizontal toolchest layoutIDREF="ch911"Changing the Orientation of the Toolchestshostssearching forIDREF="ch514"Finding Another System on the Network iconsreferences toIDREF="ch417"Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked CopiesIcon CatalogIDREF="ch10153"The Icon Catalog: An OverviewIDREF="ch310"Creating a Collection of Application IconsIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an IconIDREF="ch32"Finding Available Applicationsadding icons toIDREF="ch521"Adding Icons to an Icon Catalog Pageadding pages toIDREF="ch10160"The "New Page" CommandclosingIDREF="ch10165"The "Quit" Commandcreating new collectionsIDREF="ch522"Creating a New Page in the Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10160"The "New Page" Commandkeyboard shortcuts forIDREF="ch10187"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Icon Catalogpage display area onIDREF="ch10154"The Page Display Areaputting away icons onIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an Iconremoving pages fromIDREF="ch10162"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch524"Removing a Page From the Icon Catalogrenaming pages inIDREF="ch10161"The "Rename" CommandIDREF="ch523"Renaming an Icon Catalog Pageturning pagesIDREF="ch10164"The "Page down" Commandturning pages inIDREF="ch525"Turning Pages in the Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10163"The "Page up" Commandiconsaccessing easilyIDREF="ch518"Giving Yourself Easy Access to IconsIDREF="ch520"Placing Frequently Used Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch519"Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelfaccessing from multiple placesIDREF="ch416"Making a Linked Copyand the Icon CatalogIDREF="ch310"Creating a Collection of Application IconsarrangingIDREF="ch10145"The "by Type" CommandIDREF="ch10146"The "to Grid" CommandIDREF="ch1074"The "by Name" CommandIDREF="ch1075"The "by Date" CommandIDREF="ch1076"The "by Size" CommandIDREF="ch1077"The "by Type" CommandIDREF="ch1078"The "to Grid" CommandIDREF="ch10142"The "by Name" CommandIDREF="ch10143"The "by Date" CommandIDREF="ch10144"The "by Size" Commandautomatically appearing on desktopIDREF="ch918"Displaying New Home Directory File Icons on the Desktopcollections ofIDREF="ch310"Creating a Collection of Application IconsIDREF="ch10160"The "New Page" CommandcopyingIDREF="ch1061"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch10133"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1023"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch10167"The "Make Copy" CommandIDREF="ch415"Copying Iconsdisk drive iconsIDREF="ch513"Finding a Disk Drivedisplaying in columnsIDREF="ch530"Arranging Icons into ColumnsfindingIDREF="ch55"Finding Files: Basic InstructionsIDREF="ch1030"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1068"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch54"Finding Files: An OverviewIDREF="ch1037"The "An Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10137"The "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch51"Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10173"The "Find an Icon" Commandgroup iconsIDREF="ch310"Creating a Collection of Application Iconslinked copies ofIDREF="ch10168"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch417"Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked CopiesIDREF="ch1024"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1062"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch416"Making a Linked CopylistingIDREF="ch529"Viewing Icons as a ListmovingIDREF="ch412"Moving IconsnamingIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and DirectoriesIDREF="ch410"Naming Icons: A Few Guidelineson a shelfIDREF="ch519"Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelfon desktopIDREF="ch520"Placing Frequently Used Icons on the Desktoppeople iconsIDREF="ch511"Finding Another User's Iconprinter iconsIDREF="ch4B2"About Desktop Printer IconsIDREF="ch510"Finding a Printer Iconputting awayIDREF="ch1069"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1031"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10174"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10138"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an IconremovingIDREF="ch10169"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1025"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1063"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch418"Removing FilesrenamingIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and DirectoriesresizingIDREF="ch917"Changing the Default Size of Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch1051"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10159"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10124"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch528"Resizing IconssortingIDREF="ch527"Sorting Iconsstoring on Icon Catalog pagesIDREF="ch521"Adding Icons to an Icon Catalog Pagetape drive iconsIDREF="ch512"Finding a Tape Driveworking withIDREF="ch13"Mouse Techniques and Shortcutsimage filespreviewingIDREF="ch531"Previewing Image File Icons in a Directory View WindowIDREF="ch10150"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch10123"The Preview Images ButtonIDREF="ch10186"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch10158"The Preview Images ButtonIDREF="ch1082"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch1049"The Preview Images Buttonprinter settings forIDREF="ch4B17"Changing Printer Settings for Image FilesprintingIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format FiltersImpressarioIDREF="ch4B6"About ImpressarioInSightIDREF="ch1041"The "Online Books" Commandinstalling applicationsIDREF="ch31"Installing Applicationsinteractive window placementIDREF="ch914"Turning On Automatic Window Placementinternational settingsIDREF="ch916"Changing the Language and Keyboard LayoutIRIX commandsand command line optionsIDREF="ch35"Running Applications With Command Line OptionsIDREF="ch10116"The Launch Window.auxchestrc  fileIDREF="ch929"Adding Toolchests and Toolchest Menu Items Using the .auxchestrc File.chestrc  fileIDREF="ch930"Adding, Deleting, and Renaming Toolchests and Toolchest Menu Items Using the .chestrc File.sgisession  fileIDREF="ch927"Running Applications When You Log In Using the .sgisession FileEZsetup  accountIDREF="ch21"Using Existing Login Accountsftp  commandIDREF="ch814"Using ftp to Copy Files to Another Systemguest accountIDREF="ch21"Using Existing Login AccountsMaximize buttonIDREF="ch105"The Maximize ButtonMinimize buttonIDREF="ch104"The Minimize ButtonOutofBox  accountIDREF="ch21"Using Existing Login Accountsrcp  commandIDREF="ch812"Anatomy of the rcp Commandrlogin  commandIDREF="ch26"Logging In to Another System Using the rlogin Commandrlogin commandIDREF="ch38"Using the rlogin Command to Run Applications on Another Systemroot  accountIDREF="ch21"Using Existing Login Accountsrsh commandIDREF="ch27"Using rsh to Perform Commands on Another Systemsystem.c hestrc  fileIDREF="ch928"Modifying the Toolcheststelnet  commandIDREF="ch28"Using telnet to Log In to Another SystemWindow Menu buttonIDREF="ch103"The Window Menu Buttonkeyboard settingsIDREF="ch910"Adjusting Key-Repeat Speed and DelayIDREF="ch99"Turning On Key Clickkeyboard shortcutsfor Desks Overview windowIDREF="ch10115"Keyboard Shortcuts for Desks Overview Commandsfor Directory View windowsIDREF="ch1085"Keyboard Shortcuts for Directory View Windowsfor Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10187"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Icon Catalogfor Search toolIDREF="ch10152"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Search Toollanguages, keyboard layouts forIDREF="ch916"Changing the Language and Keyboard Layoutlarge files, findingIDREF="ch56"Finding Large FilesLaunch windowIDREF="ch10116"The Launch WindowIDREF="ch35"Running Applications With Command Line Optionslayout, saving desktopIDREF="ch915"Saving Your Desktop Layoutleft-handed mouseIDREF="ch97"Switching the Mouse for Left-Handed Uselinked copiesIDREF="ch417"Understanding the Difference Between Referenced Icons and Linked CopiesIDREF="ch10168"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1024"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch1062"The "Make Linked Copy" CommandIDREF="ch416"Making a Linked Copylisting files on a tapeIDREF="ch817"Listing Files on a Tapelisting iconsIDREF="ch1081"The "as List" CommandIDREF="ch10121"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch10185"The "as List" CommandIDREF="ch1047"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch529"Viewing Icons as a ListIDREF="ch10156"The Display as List ButtonIDREF="ch10149"The "as List" Commandlisting windowsIDREF="ch10105"The "List All..." CommandIDREF="ch65"Listing All the Windows in Your DesksIDREF="ch10114"The List All Windowlocking screen saversIDREF="ch94"Locking Your Screenlogging inIDREF="ch23"Logging Into remote systemsIDREF="ch26"Logging In to Another System Using the rlogin CommandIDREF="ch28"Using telnet to Log In to Another Systemlogging outIDREF="ch29" Logging OutIDREF="ch1020"The "Log Out" Commandlogin accountsIDREF="ch21"Using Existing Login AccountscreatingIDREF="ch22"Why Create a Login Account?finding icons forIDREF="ch511"Finding Another User's Iconlowering windowsIDREF="ch10113"The "Lower" CommandIDREF="ch76"Raising and Lowering WindowsmakeDotDesktop windowIDREF="ch10188"Understanding the makeDotDesktop Windowmaking copies of windowsIDREF="ch64"Copying Windows Between Desksman pagesIDREF="ch1042"The "Man Pages" Commandmaximizing windowsIDREF="ch105"The Maximize Buttonminimizing windowsIDREF="ch104"The Minimize ButtonIDREF="ch610"Minimizing All Windows in a DeskIDREF="ch912"Displaying the Windows OverviewIDREF="ch73"Minimizing WindowsIDREF="ch10110"The "Minimize" CommandIDREF="ch10107"The "Minimize All" Commandmonitor, and screen saversIDREF="ch93"Choosing a Screen Savermousecommon actionsIDREF="ch13"Mouse Techniques and Shortcutsmouse settingfor left-handed useIDREF="ch97"Switching the Mouse for Left-Handed Usemouse settingsIDREF="ch96"Customizing Mouse Settingsclick and double-click speedIDREF="ch98"Adjusting the Mouse Click Speedmovingicons onto the desktopIDREF="ch414"Moving Iconsicons between systemsIDREF="ch413"Moving IconswindowsIDREF="ch74"Moving a Window With a Title Barwindows between desksIDREF="ch63"Moving Windows Between Desksmoving iconsIDREF="ch412"Moving IconsnamingdesksIDREF="ch66"Renaming a DeskIDREF="ch10100"The "Rename Selected" Commandguidelines forIDREF="ch410"Naming Icons: A Few GuidelinesIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and DirectoriesIcon Catalog pagesIDREF="ch523"Renaming an Icon Catalog Pagenetworkscopying files betweenIDREF="ch810"Copying Files From One System to Another Using Directory View Windowsprinters available onIDREF="ch4B8"Placing Available Printers on Your Desktopsearching acrossIDREF="ch52"Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Another SystemIDREF="ch58"Finding Files on Another Systemsearching for systems onIDREF="ch514"Finding Another System on the Networknew directories, creatingIDREF="ch1065"The "New Directory" CommandIDREF="ch1027"The "New Directory" CommandIDREF="ch47"Creating a Directorynodesktop fileIDREF="ch925"Disabling Icons on the Desktoponline documentationIDREF="ch1041"The "Online Books" Commandonline helpIDREF="ch1040"The "Desktop Help" Commandopaque windowsIDREF="ch913"Changing the Appearance of a Moving WindowopeningapplicationsIDREF="ch33"Running ApplicationsdirectoriesIDREF="ch41"Opening a Directory: Basic InstructionsfilesIDREF="ch48" Opening Filesremote directoriesIDREF="ch46"Opening a Remote DirectoryIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another Systemorder of desksIDREF="ch611"Changing the Order of Desksorganizing windowsIDREF="ch71" Organizing Windows Into Desksowner of filesIDREF="ch83"Determining Who Owns a File or DirectoryPage menuIDREF="ch10125"The Page Menu on the Search Toolpagesin Icon CatalogIDREF="ch522"Creating a New Page in the Icon CatalogIDREF="ch525"Turning Pages in the Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10154"The Page Display Areain Search toolIDREF="ch10119"The Page Display Arearemoving from Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10162"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch524"Removing a Page From the Icon Catalogremoving from Search toolIDREF="ch10128"The "Remove" Commandrenaming in Icon CatalogIDREF="ch523"Renaming an Icon Catalog PageIDREF="ch10161"The "Rename" Commandrenaming in Search toolIDREF="ch10127"The "Rename" Commandturning Icon Catalog pagesIDREF="ch525"Turning Pages in the Icon Catalogturning Search tool pagesIDREF="ch516"Turning Pages in the Search Toolpasswords, and locking screen saversIDREF="ch94"Locking Your Screenpath barIDREF="ch1054"The Path BarIDREF="ch44"Using the Path Bar in the Icon FinderIDREF="ch1010"The Path Barpath, adding directories toIDREF="ch926"Adding Directories to Your Pathpathname fieldIDREF="ch1053"The Pathname FieldIDREF="ch109"The Pathname Fieldpermission settingsIDREF="ch10135"The "Permissions" CommandIDREF="ch10171"The "Permissions" CommandIDREF="ch1066"The "Permissions" CommandIDREF="ch1028"The "File Permissions" Commandand file ownershipIDREF="ch81"Owner, Group, and Others: A Definitiondefault settingsIDREF="ch924"Changing Default Permission SettingsdefinedIDREF="ch82"Permissions Settings: A Definitionpopping windowsIDREF="ch76"Raising and Lowering WindowsIDREF="ch10112"The "Raise" CommandPostScript files, printingIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format FiltersIDREF="ch4B16"Changing Printer Settings for PostScript Filespowering off the systemIDREF="ch210" Turning Off Your Workstationpreviewing imagesIDREF="ch531"Previewing Image File Icons in a Directory View WindowIDREF="ch10150"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch1049"The Preview Images ButtonIDREF="ch1082"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch10186"The "as Gallery" CommandIDREF="ch10158"The Preview Images ButtonIDREF="ch10123"The Preview Images ButtonPrint PanelIDREF="ch4B13"Overview of PrintPanelPrinter Manager, startingIDREF="ch4B1"About the Printer Managerprinterschecking queue forIDREF="ch4B3"About PrintStatuschoosing defaultIDREF="ch4B22"Designating a Default Printerdropping icons onIDREF="ch4B10"Printing by Dragging Icons Onto Printers or PrintPanelfinding icons ofIDREF="ch510"Finding a Printer Iconicons forIDREF="ch4B7"Placing Available Printers on Your DesktopIDREF="ch4B2"About Desktop Printer Iconsjob statusIDREF="ch4B2"About Desktop Printer Iconsqueue forIDREF="ch4B2"About Desktop Printer Iconssearching network forIDREF="ch4B8"Placing Available Printers on Your Desktopstatus ofIDREF="ch4B19"Monitoring Print Jobs and PrinterstestingIDREF="ch4B21"Testing a PrinterprintingASCII filesIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format Filtersbanner pagesIDREF="ch4B15"Setting the Banner Page Title Optionscancelling requestsIDREF="ch4B20"Cancelling a Print JobIDREF="ch4B3"About PrintStatuscustomized settingsIDREF="ch4B4"About PrintPanelIDREF="ch4B12"Customizing Print JobsfilesIDREF="ch1064"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch4B9"Printing FilesIDREF="ch10134"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch10170"The "Print" CommandIDREF="ch1026"The "Print" Commandimage filesIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format Filtersmultiple copiesIDREF="ch4B14"Specifying the Number of Copies to PrintPostScript filesIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format Filterstext filesIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format FilterstroubleshootingIDREF="ch4B23"Troubleshooting Printingprivate filesIDREF="ch84"Preventing Other Users From Viewing a File You Ownprotecting directoriesIDREF="ch85"Making a Private Directoryprotecting filesIDREF="ch84"Preventing Other Users From Viewing a File You Ownpushing windowsIDREF="ch10113"The "Lower" CommandIDREF="ch76"Raising and Lowering Windowsraising windowsIDREF="ch10112"The "Raise" CommandIDREF="ch76"Raising and Lowering Windowsreading files from tapeIDREF="ch816"Retrieving Files From a Taperearranging desksIDREF="ch611"Changing the Order of Desksrecycle buttonIDREF="ch1011"The Recycle ButtonIDREF="ch45"Using the Recycle ButtonIDREF="ch1058"The Recycle Buttonred outline of moving windowsIDREF="ch913"Changing the Appearance of a Moving Window release notesIDREF="ch1043"The "Release Notes" Commandremote directories, openingIDREF="ch1015"The "Remote Directory" CommandIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another SystemIDREF="ch37"Using the "Remote Directory" Command to Run Applications on Another SystemIDREF="ch46"Opening a Remote Directoryremote systemsand the rsh commandIDREF="ch27"Using rsh to Perform Commands on Another Systemand the telnet commandIDREF="ch28"Using telnet to Log In to Another Systemapplications onIDREF="ch36"Accessing Applications on Remote Systemscopying files betweenIDREF="ch810"Copying Files From One System to Another Using Directory View Windowscopying files to and fromIDREF="ch811"Using the rcp Command to Transfer Files and Directoriesfinding files onIDREF="ch58"Finding Files on Another SystemIDREF="ch52"Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Another Systemlogging in toIDREF="ch26"Logging In to Another System Using the rlogin Commandopening directories onIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another Systemprinters onIDREF="ch4B8"Placing Available Printers on Your DesktopremovingapplicationsIDREF="ch39"Removing Applications desksIDREF="ch67"Deleting a DeskIDREF="ch10102"The "Delete Selected" CommandfilesIDREF="ch418"Removing FilesIDREF="ch10169"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1063"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1025"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch920"Disabling the DumpsterIcon Catalog pagesIDREF="ch524"Removing a Page From the Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10162"The "Remove" CommandiconsIDREF="ch10169"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1025"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch1063"The "Remove" CommandIDREF="ch418"Removing FilesSearch tool pagesIDREF="ch10128"The "Remove" Commandwindows from global deskIDREF="ch69"Removing a Window From the Global Deskremoving icons fromIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an IconrenamingdesksIDREF="ch10100"The "Rename Selected" CommandIDREF="ch66"Renaming a DeskIcon Catalog pagesIDREF="ch523"Renaming an Icon Catalog PageIDREF="ch10161"The "Rename" CommandiconsIDREF="ch411"Renaming Files and DirectoriesSearch tool pagesIDREF="ch10127"The "Rename" CommandresizingDesks Overview windowIDREF="ch615"Resizing Snapshots or ButtonsIDREF="ch613"Hints for Resizing the Windowdisplay area in Desks Overview windowIDREF="ch10103"The "Scaling" CommandIDREF="ch615"Resizing Snapshots or ButtonsiconsIDREF="ch917"Changing the Default Size of Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch1051"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10159"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10124"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch528"Resizing IconswindowsIDREF="ch72"Resizing Windows results of a searchIDREF="ch10118"The Results Arearunning applicationsIDREF="ch33"Running ApplicationssashIDREF="ch1056"The Window Sashsavingbackup copiesIDREF="ch820"Making a Backupcustom searchesIDREF="ch515"Creating and Saving a Custom SearchfilesIDREF="ch49"Saving Filesscanners, support forIDREF="ch4B6"About Impressarioscreen saverschoosingIDREF="ch93"Choosing a Screen Saverwhen to activateIDREF="ch95"Changing the Screen Saver Activation Delayscroll barsIDREF="ch107"The Scroll BarsIDREF="ch1055"The Scroll BarsSearch toolIDREF="ch53"Finding Icons Using the Search ToolIDREF="ch10117"The Search Tool: An Overviewadding pages toIDREF="ch10126"The "New" CommandclosingIDREF="ch10131"The "Quit" Commandcustom searchesIDREF="ch515"Creating and Saving a Custom SearchIDREF="ch10126"The "New" Commandkeyboard shortcuts forIDREF="ch10152"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Search ToolPage menu onIDREF="ch10125"The Page Menu on the Search Toolpages inIDREF="ch10119"The Page Display Arearemoving pages inIDREF="ch10128"The "Remove" Commandrenaming pages inIDREF="ch10127"The "Rename" Commandresults areaIDREF="ch10118"The Results Areaturning pages inIDREF="ch516"Turning Pages in the Search ToolIDREF="ch10129"The "Page up" CommandIDREF="ch10130"The "Page down" Commandsearchingacross networksIDREF="ch52"Using "Find an Icon" to Find Icons on Another SystemIDREF="ch58"Finding Files on Another Systemby file typeIDREF="ch57"Finding Files of a Particular Typedefault search pathIDREF="ch926"Adding Directories to Your Pathfor filesIDREF="ch55"Finding Files: Basic InstructionsIDREF="ch51"Finding Icons Using the "Find an Icon" CommandIDREF="ch54"Finding Files: An Overviewfor large filesIDREF="ch56"Finding Large Filestroubleshooting remote searchesIDREF="ch517"Troubleshooting Remote Searchessecurityand locking screen saversIDREF="ch94"Locking Your Screenand login accountsIDREF="ch22"Why Create a Login Account?Selected menuIDREF="ch1059"The Selected Menu on a Directory View WindowSelected toolchestIDREF="ch1021"The Selected Toolchestsession managementIDREF="ch915"Saving Your Desktop Layoutsharing directoriesIDREF="ch10177"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch10141"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch1035"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch87"Overview of Sharing a DirectoryIDREF="ch1073"The "Share..." CommandIDREF="ch88"Sharing a Directory So Others Can View and Change Its ContentsIDREF="ch86"Sharing DirectoriesshelfdefinedIDREF="ch519"Placing Frequently Used Icons on a ShelfIDREF="ch1050"The Display Shelf ButtonIDREF="ch1057"The ShelfIDREF="ch1083"The "Shelf" Commandplacing icons onIDREF="ch519"Placing Frequently Used Icons on a Shelfputting away icons onIDREF="ch1031"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10138"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10174"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1069"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an Iconremoving icons fromIDREF="ch526"Putting Away an IconIDREF="ch1069"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch1031"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10174"The "Put Away Icon" CommandIDREF="ch10138"The "Put Away Icon" Commandshell windowsIDREF="ch1019"The "Unix Shell" Commandshortcutsfor Desks Overview windowIDREF="ch10115"Keyboard Shortcuts for Desks Overview Commandsfor Directory View windowsIDREF="ch1085"Keyboard Shortcuts for Directory View Windowsfor Icon CatalogIDREF="ch10187"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Icon Catalogfor Search toolIDREF="ch10152"Keyboard Shortcuts for the Search Toolshutting downIDREF="ch210" Turning Off Your Workstationsizefinding large filesIDREF="ch56"Finding Large Filesof Desks Overview windowIDREF="ch615"Resizing Snapshots or Buttonsof iconsIDREF="ch917"Changing the Default Size of Icons on the DesktopIDREF="ch10124"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch1051"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10159"The Thumbwheelof windowsIDREF="ch72"Resizing Windows  softwarecopyright noticeIDREF="ch1044"The "Legal Notice" CommandsoftwareinstallingIDREF="ch31"Installing Applicationssoftware overviewIDREF="ch15"Using Available Softwaresorting iconsIDREF="ch527"Sorting Iconssoundsfor desktop actionsIDREF="ch919"Turning Off Desktop Soundsvolume ofIDREF="ch1017"The "Audio Control" CommandIDREF="ch14"Adjusting the Volumestarting, applicationsIDREF="ch33"Running Applicationsstowing windowsIDREF="ch104"The Minimize ButtonIDREF="ch10110"The "Minimize" CommandIDREF="ch73"Minimizing WindowsIDREF="ch10107"The "Minimize All" CommandIDREF="ch912"Displaying the Windows OverviewIDREF="ch610"Minimizing All Windows in a Deskswitching between desksIDREF="ch10101"The "Goto Selected" CommandSystem toolchestIDREF="ch1038"The System Toolchesttape drives, icons forIDREF="ch512"Finding a Tape Drivetapescopying files fromIDREF="ch816"Retrieving Files From a Tapecopying files toIDREF="ch815"Copying Files to a Tapelisting files onIDREF="ch817"Listing Files on a Tapetar tape formatIDREF="ch815"Copying Files to a Tapetext editor, choosing defaultIDREF="ch923"Choosing a Default Editortext files, printingIDREF="ch4B5"About File Format Filtersthumbnail sketches, for imagesIDREF="ch531"Previewing Image File Icons in a Directory View Windowtitle barIDREF="ch102"The Title Bartoolbar, on Directory View windowsIDREF="ch1045"The Toolbartoolchestschanging orientation ofIDREF="ch911"Changing the Orientation of the ToolchestsDesktop toolchestIDREF="ch1012"The Desktop ToolchestFind toolchestIDREF="ch1036"The Find ToolchestHelp toolchestIDREF="ch1039"The Help ToolchestmodifyingIDREF="ch928"Modifying the ToolchestsSelected toolchestIDREF="ch1021"The Selected ToolchestSystem toolchestIDREF="ch1038"The System Toolchesttransferring directoriesIDREF="ch813"Copying a Directory Using the rcp Commandtransferring filesIDREF="ch811"Using the rcp Command to Transfer Files and Directoriestrash icon. See dumpster.IDREF="ch920"Disabling the Dumpstertroubleshootingopening remote directoriesIDREF="ch25"Opening a Directory on Another System print problemsIDREF="ch4B23"Troubleshooting Printingremote searchesIDREF="ch517"Troubleshooting Remote Searchesturning off desktop iconsIDREF="ch925"Disabling Icons on the Desktopturning off the systemIDREF="ch210" Turning Off Your Workstationturning on screen saversIDREF="ch95"Changing the Screen Saver Activation Delayuser iconsIDREF="ch511"Finding Another User's Iconvertical toolchest layoutIDREF="ch911"Changing the Orientation of the Toolchestsviewing directoriesIDREF="ch41"Opening a Directory: Basic Instructionsviewing, remote directoriesIDREF="ch24"Opening a Directory on Another SystemvolumeIDREF="ch1017"The "Audio Control" CommandIDREF="ch14"Adjusting the VolumeWindow menuIDREF="ch10104"The Window MenuWindow Settings control panelIDREF="ch914"Turning On Automatic Window PlacementIDREF="ch912"Displaying the Windows OverviewIDREF="ch915"Saving Your Desktop LayoutIDREF="ch913"Changing the Appearance of a Moving WindowIDREF="ch911"Changing the Orientation of the Toolchestswindowsanatomy ofIDREF="ch101" Anatomy of a Windowappearance while movingIDREF="ch913"Changing the Appearance of a Moving Windowarranging in desksIDREF="ch61"Creating a DeskIDREF="ch71" Organizing Windows Into Desksborder surroundingIDREF="ch106"The BorderborderlessIDREF="ch75"Moving a Borderless WindowclosingIDREF="ch77" Closing WindowscopyingIDREF="ch64"Copying Windows Between Desksdisplaying names ofIDREF="ch1093"The "Display Window Name" CommandIDREF="ch1094"The "Display Icon Name" CommandIDREF="ch1095"The "Display No Names" CommandIDREF="ch612"Displaying the Names of Windows in a Deskdrop pockets onIDREF="ch1052"The Drop PocketIDREF="ch108"The Drop PocketMinimize  button onIDREF="ch104"The Minimize ButtonIDREF="ch105"The Maximize ButtonWindow Menu button onIDREF="ch103"The Window Menu Buttonlisting all open windowsIDREF="ch10105"The "List All..." CommandIDREF="ch10114"The List All WindowIDREF="ch65"Listing All the Windows in Your DesksloweringIDREF="ch10113"The "Lower" CommandIDREF="ch76"Raising and Lowering WindowsminimizingIDREF="ch10107"The "Minimize All" CommandIDREF="ch73"Minimizing WindowsIDREF="ch610"Minimizing All Windows in a DeskIDREF="ch10110"The "Minimize" CommandmovingIDREF="ch74"Moving a Window With a Title Barmoving between desksIDREF="ch63"Moving Windows Between Deskspath bar on some windowsIDREF="ch1010"The Path BarIDREF="ch1054"The Path Barpathname field on some windowsIDREF="ch109"The Pathname FieldIDREF="ch1053"The Pathname Fieldplacing automaticallyIDREF="ch914"Turning On Automatic Window Placementplacing on all desksIDREF="ch68"Placing a Window in All DesksIDREF="ch10108"The "Add to Global" CommandraisingIDREF="ch76"Raising and Lowering WindowsIDREF="ch10112"The "Raise" Commandrecycle button onIDREF="ch1058"The Recycle ButtonIDREF="ch1011"The Recycle Buttonremoving from a deskIDREF="ch10109"The "Remove from Desk" CommandresizingIDREF="ch72"Resizing Windows scroll bars onIDREF="ch107"The Scroll BarsIDREF="ch1055"The Scroll Barstitle bar onIDREF="ch102"The Title Barzooming iconsIDREF="ch10159"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch528"Resizing IconsIDREF="ch1051"The ThumbwheelIDREF="ch10124"The Thumbwheel